Vauxhall | Astravan (January 2006) | Owner Manual | Vauxhall TwinTop Edition 2 2011 Owner`s manual

Vauxhall TwinTop Edition 2 2011 Owner`s manual
Owner’s Manual
ASTRA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: January 2006.
TS 1612-B-06
A ST R A
©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.
VAUXHALL Astra
Owner’s Manual
Seite -2, , Bearbeitung 19.12.05
Data specific to your vehicle
Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it easily accessible.
This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate.
Fuel
Designation
Engine oil
Grade
Viscosity
Tyre inflation pressure
Tyre size
with up to 3 persons
with full load
Summer tyres
front
rear
front
rear
Winter tyres
front
rear
front
rear
Weights
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight
–
EC kerbweight
=
Loading
Seite -1, , Bearbeitung 19.12.05
Your Astra
Developed according to the latest findings of vehicle research, it offers technical sophistication and exceptional comfort.
Your Astra represents an intelligent synthesis of advanced technology, outstanding safety, environmental compatibility and economy.
It now lies with you to drive your Astra safely and to see it performs perfectly.
This Owner’s Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end.
Make sure your passengers are aware of the possible risk of accident and injury which may result from improper use of the vehicle.
The Owner’s Manual should always be kept in the vehicle: ready to hand in the glove compartment.
Make use of the Owner’s Manual:
z Its "In brief" section will give you an initial overview.
z The table of contents at the beginning of the owner’s manual
and within the individual chapters will show you where everything is.
z Its index will help you find what you want.
z It will familiarise you with the sophisticated technology.
z It will increase your pleasure in your vehicle.
z It will help you to handle your vehicle expertly.
The Owner’s Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood.
This symbol signifies:
6 Continue reading on next page.
3 The asterisk signifies: equipment not fitted to all vehicles
(model variants, engine options, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories).
9 Warning
Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury.
Disregard of the instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life.
Inform your passengers accordingly.
Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed.
Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed.
We wish you many hours of pleasurable driving
Your Vauxhall Team
Seite 0, , Bearbeitung 20.12.05
Contents
Commitment to customer
satisfaction:
Our aim: to keep you happy with your
vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers
offer first class service at competitive
prices. Experienced, factory-trained
technicians work according to factory
instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can
supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALLAPPROVED PARTS, which have undergone
stringent quality and precision checks, and
of course useful and attractive
VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES.
Our name is your guarantee!
For details of the
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network
please ring this number; 01582 - 427200
In brief ....................................................... 2
Instruments ............................................. 36
Keys, doors, bonnet .............................. 66
Seats, Interior .......................................... 87
Safety systems ..................................... 109
Lighting ................................................. 134
Windows, sunroof ................................ 141
TwinTop ................................................ 146
Climate control .................................... 153
Easytronic ............................................. 174
Automatic transmission ...................... 182
Automatic transmission
with ActiveSelect .............................. 188
Driving hints ......................................... 196
Saving fuel,
protecting the environment ............ 198
Fuel consumption,
fuel, refuelling .................................. 200
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 203
Drive control systems .......................... 208
Brakes .................................................... 222
Wheels, tyres ......................................... 226
Roof racks,
caravan and trailer towing ............. 234
Self-help ................................................ 243
If you have a problem ......................... 288
Maintenance, inspection system ........ 290
Vehicle care .......................................... 302
Technical data .................................... 306
Index ...................................................... 342
2
In brief
In brief
Picture no: 17027t.tif
Key numbers,
code numbers
Remove key number from keys.
The key number is specified in the vehicle
documents and in the Car Pass.
Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: make
a note of the key identifier codes.
Electronic immobiliser, Infotainment
system 3: the code numbers are specified
in the Car Pass.
Do not keep the Car Pass in the vehicle.
For key with retractable key blade 3,
press button to extend.
6 Further information – see pages 66, 67,
vehicle recommissioning – see page 301.
Picture no: 16968t.tif
To unlock and open the vehicle:
Press button q,
pull door handle
In vehicles with an Open&Start system 3,
the vehicle is unlocked automatically by
pulling a door handle or by operating the
button beneath the tailgate handle, if the
electronic key is in the external reception
range of the vehicle.
6 Door locks, child safety locks –
see page 86,
electronic immobiliser – see page 67,
keys – see page 66,
Open&Start system 3 – see page 70,
radio frequency remote control –
see page 68,
central locking system – see page 76,
anti-theft locking system – see page 76,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 83,
TwinTop roof operation 3 – see page 146.
In brief
Picture no: 16969t.tif
To unlock and
open the luggage compartment:
Press button q on
remote control and
operate button beneath handle
In vehicles with Open&Start system 3 the
tailgate is unlocked automatically by
operating the button beneath the handle if
the electronic key is within the external
reception range of the vehicle. The doors
are also unlocked.
6 Open&Start-System 3 – see page 70,
radio frequency remote control –
see page 68,
central locking system – see page 76,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 83.
Picture no: 16970t.tif
To adjust front seat:
Pull handle,
slide seat,
release handle
Never adjust the front seat while driving. It
could move in an uncontrolled manner
when the handle is pulled.
6 Seating position – see page 87.
9 Warning
Important: Do not sit nearer than
10 inches (25 cm) from the steering
wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment.
Picture no: 16971t.tif
To adjust front seat backrest:
Turn handwheel
Move backrest to suit seating position.
Do not lean on seat backrest whilst
adjusting it.
6 Seating position – see page 87.
3
4
In brief
Picture no: 16972t.tif
Picture no: 16973t.tif
To adjust front seat lumbar
support 3:
Turn handwheel
To adjust front seat height 3:
Operate lever on outboard side
of seat
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal
requirements.
Lever pumping action
upward:
seat higher
downward: seat lower
Do not lean on seat backrest whilst
adjusting it.
6 Seating position – see page 87.
6 Seating position – see page 87.
Picture no: 16974t.tif
To adjust front seat inclination 3:
Pull inner lever on front of seat,
adjust inclination,
release lever,
engage seat in position
Adjust the inclination by distributing body
weight.
6 Seating position – see page 87.
In brief
Picture no: 16975t.tif
To fold the front seat backrest
forward 3:
Lift release lever,
fold backrest forward and lock,
slide seat forward
To raise seat, slide back to stop, lift release
lever and raise backrest.
In front seats with memory-function 3, the
seat engages in its original position when
pushed back.
In front seats without memory function 3,
engage seat in required position when
pushing backwards.
Panoramic windscreen 3: before folding
the seat, push the head restraints down
and close the sunvisors.
6 Seating position – see page 87.
Picture no: 17959t.tif
To adjust thigh support 3
of the front sport seat 3:
Press button in recessed handle
centred in the lower half of the
adjustment cushion and
adjust the thigh support
Adjust thigh support to suit personal
requirements.
Picture no: 16976t.tif
5
To adjust head restraint height of
front and rear outboard seats:
Press button to release,
adjust height,
engage in position
6 Adjusting centre rear head restraint –
see page 88,
head restraint position – see page 88,
head restraint removal – see page 88.
6
In brief
Picture no: 16977t.tif
Adjusting interior mirror:
Swivel mirror housing
Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing
to reduce dazzle at night.
6 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror –
see page 132.
Picture no: 16978t.tif
Picture no: 18021T.tif
To adjust exterior mirrors:
From inside, swivel lever in
required direction
Electrical exterior mirrors 3,
adjust:
Four-way switch in driver’s door
6 Further information, aspherical exterior
mirror 3 – see page 132.
Press mirror switch right or left: four-way
switch adjusts corresponding mirror.
6 Further information, aspherical exterior
mirror – see page 132,
heated exterior mirrors – see page 18.
In brief
Picture no: 16980t.tif
Swing-in exterior mirror:
Manually: press lightly.
Electrically 3: press n and both mirrors will
swing in.
Press button n again - both exterior
mirrors swivel to the driving position.
If an electrical retracted mirror is extended
manually, pressing button n will cause the
mirror to move all the way forward. The
other mirror will be electrically swivelled to
the driving position. If button n is pressed
again, both mirrors will be electrically
retracted. Press again: both mirrors swivel
to the driving position.
Picture no: 16981t.tif
7
Picture no: 17328t.tif
Fitting seat belt:
Draw seat belt smoothly from
inertia reel,
guide over shoulder
and engage in buckle
Steering wheel adjustment:
Move lever down,
adjust height and distance,
move lever up,
engage
The belt must not be twisted at any point.
The lap belt must lie snugly against the
body. The backrest must not be tilted back
too far (recommended maximum tilting
angle approx. 25°).
Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
stationary and steering column lock is
released.
To release belt, press red button on belt
buckle.
6 Seat belt – see page 110,
airbag systems – see page 115,
seating position – see page 87.
6 Airbag systems – see page 115.
8
In brief
In brief
1
Page
Side air vents .................................. 155
8
Page
Instruments ....................................... 36
2
Front passenger’s airbag ............. 116
9
Horn .................................................. 16
3
Centre air vents ............................. 155
4
Central Information Display for
time, date, outside temperature,
Infotainment system 3,
check control 3 ................................ 62
Trip computer 3 .........................52, 58
Electronic Climate Control 3 ....... 167
10 Windscreen wiper,
windscreen wash system,
headlight wash system 3 and
rear window wash system ......... 17, 18
5
Heated seat (left) 3 ...................... 156
Deflation Detection System 3 ....... 217
Tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 ......................................... 218
Parking distance sensors 3 .......... 214
Hazard warning lights ..................... 16
Central locking system .................... 78
SPORT mode 3 ............................... 210
Heated seat (right) 3 .................... 156
6
Turn signal lights, headlight flash
dipped beam, main beam .............. 15
Door-to-door lighting function ...... 138
Parking lights 3 ............................. 138
Cruise control 3 ....................... 13, 212
7
Remote control 3 for
Infotainment system ........................ 64
99
Page
13 Starter switch with
electronic immobiliser .................... 14
and
sensor panel for emergency
operation Open&Start system 3 ... 73
14 Accelerator pedal.................. 196, 197
11 Parking lights, dipped beam ........ 134
Instrument illumination ................. 138
Fog tail light ................................... 135
Front fog lights 3 ........................... 135
Headlight range adjustment 3 .... 136
15 Brake pedal ................... 197, 222, 223
12 Bonnet release lever ........................ 86
19 Ashtray 3 ....................................... 106
Cigarette lighter 3 ........................ 105
16 Clutch pedal 3 ............................... 197
17 Steering wheel adjustment ............... 7
18 Start / Stop button 3 ................ 22, 70
20 Climate control ............................. 153
21 Infotainment system 3.................... 65
22 Glove compartment ....... 72, 108, 155
10
In brief
Q
Door open,
see page 38.
S
Open&Start system 3,
see pages 36, 70.
Engine oil level 3,
see pages 39, 292.
p
8
Engine oil pressure,
see page 37.
Alternator,
see page 39.
Exterior lights,
see pages 39, 134.
W
Coolant temperature,
see pages 39, 294.
r
Parking distance sensors 3,
see page 214.
A
Engine electronics,
Transmission electronics 3,
Electronic immobiliser,
Diesel fuel filter 3,
Fault,
see pages 39, 67, 180, 186,
194, 206.
O
Turn signal lights,
see pages 15, 40.
Y
Fuel level,
see pages 40, 45, 201.
>
Front fog lights 3,
see pages 40, 135.
C
Main beam,
see pages 15, 40.
r
Fog tail light,
see pages 40, 135.
Control indicators
0
I
R
Brake system,
clutch system,
see pages 38, 222, 296.
v
Airbag systems,
belt tensioners,
deployable anti-roll bar 3,
see pages 112, 121, 130.
v
Electronic
Stability Programme
(ESP®Plus) 3,
see page 208.
X
Seat belt 3,
see pages 38, 113.
IDS+
Interactive Driving System 3,
Continuous Damping Control 3,
SPORT mode 3,
see pages 210, 211.
In brief
T
1
Winter programme of
automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3,
see pages 177, 185, 192.
SPORT mode of
automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3,
see pages 176, 184, 191.
y
Seat occupancy recognition 3,
see page 122.
Z
Exhaust emission 3,
see pages 41, 205.
u
Anti-lock Brake System,
see page 225.
!
Preheating system 3,
Diesel particle filter 3,
see page 42.
w
B
m
Deflation
Detection System (DDS) 3,
tyre pressure monitoring
system 3,
see pages 42, 217, 220.
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3
(AFL), Fault,
see pages 137, 140.
Cruise control 3,
see pages 13, 212.
Lighting
Light switch,
switch positions,
see pages 14, 134,
7
8
9
Lights off,
>
Front fog lights 3,
see page 135.
r
Fog tail light,
see page 135.
C
Main beam,
see page 15.
O
Turn signal lights,
see page 15.
k
Instrument illumination,
see page 138.
c
Courtesy light,
see page 139.
a
Reading lights 3,
see page 139.
¨
Hazard warning lights,
see page 16.
Parking lights,
Dipped beam, main beam.
11
12
In brief
Climate control
Air distribution,
see pages 157, 171,
n
Air conditioning system 3,
see pages 19, 160, 164.
4
Sunroof 3
ü
Air recirculation system 3,
see pages 160, 164, 172.
Sunroof,
opening or tilting – see page 145.
d
Sunroof,
closing – see page 145.
L
to head area via adjustable
air vents and to footwell,
M
to head area via
adjustable air vents,
AUTO
G
l
Automatic mode 3,
see pages 19, 168.
to windscreen,
J
V
to windscreen and
to footwell,
Demisting and defrosting 3,
see pages 19, 159, 162, 170.
Sunblind,
opening – see page 145.
H
K
to footwell.
ß
Heated front seats 3,
see page 156.
Sunblind,
closing – see page 145.
Windscreen wiper
x
Airflow,
see pages 157, 171.
A
Ü
Automatic control
of fan speed 3,
see page 164.
Heated rear window,
see pages 18, 156.
Stalk positions,
see pages 17, 18,
Astra TwinTop 3
>
Open roof,
see page 147.
<
Close roof,
see page 147.
"
Central switch
window operation,
opening,
see page 142.
"
Central switch
window operation,
closing,
see page 142.
§
$
Off,
%
&
Slow,
Timed interval wipe, or
automatic wipe
with rain sensor 3,
Fast.
In brief
Cruise control 3
m
g
§
E
Deflation Detection System 3,
tyre pressure monitoring
system 3,
see pages 217, 218.
Central locking system,
unlocking, see page 78.
r
m
Parking distance sensors 3,
see page 214.
Central locking switch,
see page 78.
SPORT
b
SPORT mode 3,
see page 210.
Vauxhall alarm system 3,
see page 83.
T
0
Emergency operation
Open&Start system,
see page 73.
Winter programme,
Easytronic 3,
automatic transmission 3,
see pages 177, 185, 192.
z
j
Child safety system
for rear windows 3,
see page 142.
Horn,
see page 16.
+
First-aid kit (cushion) 3,
see page 248.
¨
Warning triangle 3,
see page 248.
Miscellaneous
Buttons on turn signal stalk,
see pages 16, 212.
p
Central locking system,
locking, see page 76.
Activate, store,
accelerate,
q
resume
stored speed,
decelerate,
deactivate.
Information display,
Infotainment system
Information display,
see page 46.
Ö
On button for date and time:
see page 48.
;
Setting buttons for date and time:
see page 48.
Remote control for
Infotainment system 3,
see pages 49, 64.
13
14
In brief
Picture no: 16982t.tif
Steering column lock and ignition:
Turn key to position 1;
release steering column lock by
moving the steering wheel slightly
Positions:
0 = Ignition off
1 = Steering released, ignition off
2 = Ignition on,
with diesel engine: preheating
3 = Start
To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition
off, remove key and engage steering
wheel.
6 Starting – see page 22,
electronic immobiliser – see page 67,
parking the vehicle – see page 24.
Picture no: 17033t.tif
Steering column lock and ignition
on vehicles with Open&Start
system 3:
Make sure electronic key is
inside the car and press
the Start / Stop button;
release steering column lock by
moving the steering wheel slightly
To start the vehicle, also operate brake or
clutch pedal.
To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition
off by pressing the Start / Stop button,
open driver’s door and engage steering
wheel. Do not allow vehicle to move whilst
doing this.
6 Starting – see page 22,
electronic immobiliser – see page 67,
parking the vehicle – see page 24.
Picture no: 16986t.tif
Light switch:
7
= Off
8
= Parking lights
9
= Dipped or main beam
AUTO = Daytime running lights 3
Press > = Front fog lights 3
Press r = Fog tail light
6 Further information – see page 134,
headlight warning device – see page 23.
In brief
Picture no: 16987t.tif
Dipped and main beam switch:
Main beam
= Push stalk
forward
Dipped beam = Push stalk
forward again
or pull toward
steering wheel
The blue control indicator C is illuminated
when main beam is on.
Picture no: 16988t.tif
Headlight flash:
Pull stalk towards steering wheel
15
Picture no: 16989t.tif
To operate turn signal lights:
Right = Move stalk up
Left = Move stalk down
After operation, the turn signal stalk
returns to its starting position.
If the stalk is moved past the resistance
point, the turn signal light remains on.
When the steering wheel moves back
toward the straight-ahead position, the
turn signal light is automatically
deactivated.
Tap signal: move stalk to resistance point
and release to activate three flashes from
the turn signals when changing lanes or the
like.
Move the stalk to the resistance point and
hold for the turn signals to flash longer.
Switch the turn signal off manually by
moving the stalk slightly.
16
In brief
Picture no: 16990t.tif
Picture no: 16991t.tif
Picture no: 16992t.tif
Cruise control operation 3:
Press button on stalk
Hazard warning lights:
On = Press ¨
Off = Press ¨ again
Activate horn:
Press j in centre of steering
wheel
Switch off: briefly press button §.
To aid location of the pushbutton, the red
surface is illuminated when the ignition is
switched on. When the button is pressed,
its control indicator flashes in time with the
hazard warning lights.
6 Airbag systems – see page 115,
Steering wheel mounted remote control
buttons for Infotainment system 3 –
see page 64.
Switch on: briefly press button m.
Resume at stored speed: briefly press
button g.
6 Cruise control 3 – see page 212.
In brief
Picture no: 16993t.tif
Windscreen wiper:
Move stalk upward
§ = Off
$ = Adjustable timed
interval wipe
% = Slow
& = Fast
Stalk always moves back to starting
position. Shift to next higher or lower level:
move stalk slightly.
Push stalk past resistance point and hold:
the windscreen wiper stages are run
through; an acoustic signal sounds at
position §.
Press stalk down from position §:
single swipe.
6 Further information –
see pages 297, 304.
Picture no: 16994t.tif
Windscreen wiper:
Adjustable timed interval wiper
To set the wiper interval to a value between
2 and 15 seconds:
Switch on ignition.
Press stalk down from position §.
Wait the desired interval.
Set the stalk to timed interval wipe $.
The interval remains stored until the next
change or the ignition is switched off.
Switching the ignition on and moving the
stalk to $ sets the interval to 4 seconds.
17
Picture no: 16995t.tif
Automatic wiping with rain
sensor 3:
Move stalk upward
$ = Automatic wiping with
rain sensor
Automatic wiping $: the rain sensor
detects the amount of water on the
windscreen and automatically regulates
the windscreen wiper.
To switch off, move stalk downwards.
6 Further information –
see pages 297, 304.
18
In brief
Picture no: 16996t.tif
Operating windscreen and
headlight wash systems 3:
Pull stalk towards steering wheel
The wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low
speeds, there is a single post-wash swipe.
The headlight wash system 3 can be
operated when the lights are on. Wash
fluid is sprayed on the headlights. The
headlight wash system cannot be
operated for 2 minutes thereafter.
Picture no: 16997t.tif
To operate rear window wiper 3
and wash system 3:
Wiper on = Push stalk
forward
Wiper off = Push stalk
forward again
Wash
= Press and hold
The rear window wiper swipes in timed
interval mode.
On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3,
keep the sensor area clean by operating
the wash system regularly.
The rear window wiper engages
automatically when the windscreen wiper
is switched on and reverse gear is
engaged.
6 Further information –
see pages 297, 304.
6 Further information –
see pages 297, 304.
Picture no: 16998t.tif
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors:
On = Press Ü
Off = Press Ü again
Heating operational only with engine
running.
The rear window and exterior mirror
heating is switched off automatically
after approx. 15 minutes.
6 Further information – see page 156.
In brief
Range
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
Picture no: 16999t.tif
To demist or defrost windows:
Set air distribution to l,
rotary knob for temperature and
airflow clockwise;
Air conditioning system 3:
Also press button n;
Automatic air conditioning
system 3:
Press button n and v,
turn rotary knob for
temperature clockwise,
airflow to A;
Electronic Climate Control
(ECC) 3:
Press button V
Open air vents and direct the side air vents
toward the door windows.
6 Climate control – see page 153.
Picture no: 17000t.tif
To set automatic mode of
Electronic Climate Control
(ECC) 3:
Press AUTO button,
set temperature using rotary
knob
Open all air vents.
6 Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 –
see page 167.
23°
5
19
257 miles
7.6 miles/gal
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Information display 3:
Provides information:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
time,
outside temperature,
radio 3 and date,
navigation 3,
telephone 3,
check control 3,
trip computer 3,
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3.
6 Information Display 3 – see page 46.
20
In brief
Picture no: 17001t.tif
Manual transmission:
Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, wait
3 seconds after declutching and then pull
up the button on the selector lever and
engage the gear.
If the gear does not engage, set the lever
in neutral, release the clutch pedal and
depress again; then repeat gear selection.
Picture no: 17002t.tif
Easytronic 3:
N
= Neutral (idle)
o
= Drive position
+
= Higher gear
= Lower gear
A
= Change between
automatic and
manual mode
R
= Reverse
(with selector lever lock)
The selector lever must always be moved
in the appropriate direction as far as it will
go. Upon release, it automatically returns
to the centre position. Pay heed to the
gear / mode indicator in the transmission
display.
The foot brake must be depressed when
starting.
6 Easytronic – see page 174.
Picture no: 17003t.tif
Automatic transmission 3:
P = Park
R = Reverse
N = Neutral (idle)
D = Automatic gear selection
3 = 1st to 3rd gear
2 = 1st and 2nd gear
1 = 1st gear
Starting only possible in P or N. To move
from P, switch on ignition, depress foot
brake and press button on selector lever.
Press button on selector lever to engage P
or R.
P:
R:
Only with vehicle stationary, first
apply handbrake
Only with vehicle stationary
6 Automatic transmission – see page 182.
In brief
21
To select P or R, press button on selector
lever.
P: Only with vehicle stationary, first
apply handbrake
R: Only with vehicle stationary
6 Automatic transmission with 3 –
see page 188.
Picture no: 17330t.tif
Automatic transmission with
ActiveSelect 3:
P = Park
R = Reverse gear
N = Neutral (idle)
D = Automatic gear selection
Selector lever in D to left:
Manual mode
+ = Higher gear or stage
- = Lower gear or stage
P or N must be engaged when starting.
To move from P or N, switch on ignition,
depress foot brake and press button on
selector lever.
Picture no: 17004t.tif
Exhaust gases are poisonous
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is extremely poisonous but is
odourless and colourless.
Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and
never run the engine in an enclosed space.
Avoid driving with an open luggage
compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases
could penetrate the interior.
22
In brief
Before starting-off, check:
z Tyre pressure and tyre condition – see
pages 228, 326.
z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine
compartment – see pages 291 to 299.
z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting
and number plates are free from dirt,
snow and ice and are operational.
z No objects are placed in front of the rear
window, on the instrument panel or in
the area in which the airbags inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
correctly adjusted.
z Brake operation.
Picture no: 17005t.tif
To start engine:
Operate clutch and brake,
automatic transmission 3
in P or N,
Easytronic 3: depress brake,
do not accelerate,
petrol engines:
Turn key to position 3;
diesel engine:
Turn key to position 2,
when control indicator ! goes
out1) turn key to position 3;
release key once engine is
running
Picture no: 17033t.tif
Before restarting or switching off the
engine, turn key back to 0.
To start engine with Open&Start
system 3:
The electronic key must be inside
the vehicle,
operate clutch or brake,
automatic transmission 3
in P or N,
Easytronic 3: depress brake,
do not accelerate,
petrol engine: Press button;
diesel engine: Briefly press
button, when control indicator !
goes out1) press button again for
1 second;
release button once engine is
running
To switch on the ignition, only turn the
key to 2.
Press button again to repeat the starting
procedure or switch off the engine.
6 Further information – see pages 67, 243.
1)
Preheating system switches on only if outside
temperature is low.
In brief
23
Warning buzzers
Only press briefly to switch in the ignition if
the brake or clutch pedal has not been
depressed.
When starting the engine or whilst driving:
z if the electronic key of the Open&Start
system is not present or is not
recognised 3,
Do not start unless vehicle is stationary.
6 Further information – see pages 67, 243.
z if a door or the tailgate is ajar,
z once you have reached a certain speed if
the handbrake is applied 3,
z if a specified maximum speed is
exceeded 3,
Picture no: 17006t.tif
Releasing the handbrake:
Raise lever slightly,
press lock button,
lower lever fully
To reduce operating forces, depress foot
brake at the same time.
Drive carefully, economically and with the
environment in mind. While driving, do not
do anything that could distract you.
6 Brakes - see page 222.
z for Easytronic 3 – if A, M or R is selected
while the engine is running and the
driver’s door is opened but the foot
brake is not depressed.
When the vehicle is parked and the driver’s
door is opened:
z when the key is in the starter switch,
z with parking lights or dipped beam on,
z with Open&Start system 3 and
automatic transmission if the selector
lever is not in P,
z with Easytronic 3 – if the handbrake is
not applied and no gear is engaged
when the engine is off.
24
In brief
Indicator and warning buzzers for
Astra TwinTop 3:
z Indicator buzzer upon completed
opening or closing of the convertible
hardtop.
z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising
or lowering of the electric luggage
compartment loading aid.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed
during roof operation.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully
opening during operation of the luggage
compartment loading aid.
z Continuous warning buzzer during roof
operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have
been triggered.
z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
minute before the end of the 9-minute
standby time with the roof in an
intermediate position.
z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
minute before the end of the 9-minute
standby time with the loading aid in a
raised position.
Picture no: 17007t.tif
z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully
open or closed.
Parking the vehicle:
Apply handbrake firmly,
turn engine off,
turn ignition off,
lock steering wheel,
lock vehicle
z Three gong tones during roof or loading
aid operation if the luggage
compartment blind is not attached.
To lock, press p button or with Open&Start
system 3 touch sensor in one of the front
door handles.
z Three gong tones during roof operation
if outside temperature is below –20 °C,
vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
system is overloaded.
With Open&Start system 3, the driver’s
door must be opened to lock the steering
wheel.
z Gong tone during roof operation if
vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h).
In brief
To activate the anti-theft locking system
and the Vauxhall alarm system 3 press
button p twice or with Open&Start
system 3 touch sensor in one of the front
door handles twice.
Advice when parking:
6 Further information – see pages 67, 196,
Open&Start system – see page 70,
radio frequency remote control – see
page 68,
central locking system – see page 76,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 83,
vehicle decommissioning – see page 301,
TwinTop roof operation 3 – see page 146.
z Always apply the handbrake firmly.
Apply the handbrake as firmly as
possible on uphill or downhill slopes. To
reduce operating forces, depress foot
brake at the same time.
z Do not park the vehicle on an easy
flammable surface. The high
temperature of the exhaust system
could ignite the surface.
z Close the windows and sunroof 3 or
TwinTop.
z Before switching off ignition: with
manual transmission, engage first or
reverse gear; with automatic
transmission 3, selector lever in P; with
Easytronic 3 engage first or reverse gear
(note gear indicator – see page 174).
z For automatic transmission 3 the key
can only be removed when the selector
lever is in position P. With the Open&Start
system 3 "P" flashes in the transmission
display for several seconds if P has not
been selected or the handbrake has not
been applied.
25
z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control
indicator R flashes for a few seconds
after the ignition is switched off if the
handbrake has not been applied –
see page 179.
z With the Open&Start system 3 the
engine can only be switched off when
the vehicle is stationary.
z Remove key. With Open&Start system 3,
switch off ignition and open driver’s
door.
z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to
engage (anti-theft protection).
z The engine cooling fans may run after
the engine has been switched off – see
page 291.
6 Further information –
see pages 300, 301.
26
In brief
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and
Accessories
Picture no: 17008t.tif
Service work,
maintenance
We recommend that you entrust all work to
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who
can provide you with reliable service and
correctly perform all work according to
factory instructions.
6 If you have a problem – see page 288,
service interval display –
see pages 44, 290.
We recommend that you use "Genuine
Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and
conversion parts expressly approved for
your vehicle type. These parts have
undergone special tests to establish their
reliability, safety and specific suitability for
Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous
market monitoring, we cannot assess or
guarantee these attributes for other
products, even if they have been granted
approval by the relevant authorities or in
some other form.
"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"
and conversion parts approved by
Vauxhall can be obtained from your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can
provide comprehensive advice about
permissible technical changes and ensure
that the part is installed correctly.
9 Warning
Carry out regularly the checks
recommended in the individual sections
of this Owner’s Manual.
Ensure that your vehicle is serviced at the
service intervals specified in the Service
Booklet. We recommend that you entrust
this work to your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Have faults remedied without delay!
Consult a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If
necessary, interrupt your journey.
6 Maintenance – see page 290.
In brief
27
That was the most important
information for your
first drive in your Astra.
The other pages of this chapter
contain a summary of the
interesting functions
in your vehicle.
The remaining chapters
of the Owner’s Manual
contain important information
on operation, safety and
maintenance as well as
a complete index.
28
In brief
Picture no: 17009t.tif
Vauxhall Full-size airbag system
The Vauxhall Full-size airbag system
comprises several individual systems.
Front airbag system
The front airbag system will be triggered in
the event of a serious accident involving a
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
Picture no: 17010t.tif
Picture no: 17011t.tif
Side airbag system
The side airbag system triggers when a
side-on collision occurs and provides a
safety barrier for the driver and/or
passenger in the respective front door
area. This reduces the risk of injury to the
upper body considerably in case of a sideimpact.
Active head restraints 3
at front seats
Curtain airbag system 3
The curtain airbag system triggers in case
of a side-on collision and provides a safety
barrier in the head area on the respective
side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
injury to the head considerably in case of a
side-on collision.
Active head restraints are identified by the
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint
guide sleeves.
6 Further information – see page 115.
In the event of a rear-end impact, the
active head restraints automatically tilt
forwards. The head is more effectively
supported by the head restraint and the
risk of injuries caused by whiplash in the
neck area is reduced.
In brief
Picture no: 17012t.tif
Picture no: 17013t.tif
Operating menus in
the information display 3
Selection using multi-function button:
rotate and press multi-function button.
Menu options are selected using menus
and using the buttons or the four-way
button or the multi-function button on the
Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
The respective menu options are shown
on the display.
To exit a menu, turn the multi-function
button left or right to Return or Main and
select.
Selection using four-way button:
press four-way button at top, bottom,
left or right.
Picture no: 17014t.tif
29
Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on
steering wheel: rotate and press adjuster
wheel.
30
In brief
FM AS
[TP]
�
REG
CDin
MP3
Coolant level
90.6 MHz
19,5°
check
19:36
Picture no: 17331t.tif
OK
Picture no: 17339t.tif
Trip computer 3
Check control 3
The trip computers provide information on
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically.
The check control software monitors
Functions:
z Range
z Instantaneous consumption
z Distance travelled
z Average speed
z Effective consumption
z Average consumption
z Stop watch
z Tyre pressure 3
z Fluid levels
z Tyre pressure 3
z Radio frequency remote control battery
z Vauxhall alarm system 3
z Important exterior lights, including
cables and fuses
Picture no: 17015t.tif
Remote control for
Infotainment system 3
The functions of the Infotainment system 3
and the information display can be
operated with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Further information is available in the
Infotainment system operating
instructions.
In brief
Picture no: 17026t.tif
Twin Audio 3
Twin Audio provides rear seat occupants
the opportunity to listen to a different
audio source than the one selected by the
driver on the Infotainment system.
Only an audio source that is not currently
active on the Infotainment system can be
controlled using Twin Audio.
Two headphone connections are available,
with separate volume controls.
Further information is available in the
Infotainment system operating
instructions.
Picture no: 17333t.tif
Open&Start system with
electronic key and radio
frequency remote control 3
The Open&Start system allows the vehicle
to be locked and unlocked, including antitheft locking system and the Vauxhall
alarm system 3 without a mechanical key
and the engine to be started and stopped
using a Start / Stop button. All the driver
has to do is carry the electronic key around
with him.
31
Picture no: 17203t.tif
Parking distance sensors 3
When reverse gear is selected, the parking
distance sensors switch on automatically.
The parking distance sensors can also be
activated at speeds of less than 15 mph
(25 km/h) by pressing the r button on
the instrument panel.
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when
reversing, a series of signals can be heard
in the vehicle interior. The interval between
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous.
32
In brief
Picture no: 17961t.tif
Sport mode 3
To activate
Press SPORT button.
SPORT mode is used to change damping 3,
steering 3, throttle application and the
shift point for Easytronic 3 and automatic
transmission 3 while driving.
Damping and steering become more direct
and provide better contact with the road
surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
accelerator movements.
With Easytronic 3 and automatic
transmission 3, the shift times are
shortened and shifting takes place at
higher revs (not with cruise control
enabled 3).
Picture no: 17018t.tif
Tyre pressure loss monitoring
system
(DDS = Deflation Detection
System) 3
The Deflation Detection System
continuously monitors the speed of all
wheels while driving. If a tyre loses
pressure, it grows smaller and therefore
rotates more quickly than the other wheels.
If the system detects a difference in speed,
the control indicator w illuminates red.
Picture no: 17019t.tif
After tyre pressure is corrected or a tyre
or wheel is changed, the system must be
initialised by pressing the DDS button.
In brief
33
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Picture no: 17334t.tif
Tyre pressure monitoring
system 3
The tyre pressure monitoring system
continually checks the pressure and
speed of all four wheels while driving.
A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel.
The inflation pressures of the individual
wheels are transmitted to a controller,
where they are compared.
The current tyre pressures can be
displayed on the Graphical Information
Display or the Colour Information
Display 3.
Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in
the form of messages on the information
display whilst driving.
Picture no: 17126t.tif
Adaptive Forward Lighting
(AFL) 3
Improves lighting in curves (curve lighting)
on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight
system.
Picture no:
Curve lighting
The Xenon light beam pivots based on
steering wheel position and speed (from
approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)).
The headlights shine at an angle of up
to 15° to the right or left of the direction
of travel.
Motorway lighting
At higher speeds and continuous
straight ahead travel, the dipped beam
automatically raises slightly, thereby
increasing headlight range.
34
In brief
Picture no: 17979t.tif
Panoramic windscreen 3
To open
Turn the handle to the right and move the
roof lining rearward to a suitable position.
To close
Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
position. When moved all the way forward,
the roof lining engages in position.
Picture no: 17059t.tif
Picture no: 17092t.tif
Adjusting the rear row of seats 3
Cargo box 3
z Pull the handle below the seat
Collapsible box to divide the luggage
compartment.
z Slide the seat bench to the desired
position
z Release the handle and engage the seat
bench
The cargo box may only be loaded when
the backrests are engaged in an upright
position.
When removing, start with the right half.
In brief
Picture no: 17087t.tif
FlexOrganizer 3
The side walls contain retaining strips,
where various components can be
attached to divide the luggage
compartment or fasten loads.
The system consists of
z adapters
z variable partition net
z mesh pockets for the side walls
z hooks in the luggage compartment
Picture no: 17980t.tif
Luggage compartment cover,
Estate
To open
Push handle on luggage compartment
cover down. The cover automatically
unrolls.
35
Picture no: 17981t.tif
Astra TwinTop
With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
a convertible.
To optimise safety, the Astra TwinTop is
equipped with a rollover protection system
with reinforced windscreen frame and the
choice of fixed or deployable anti-roll bars
in addition to the front and side airbag
systems.
The roof is operated with the buttons on
the roof console above the mirror or with
the remote control.
To improve luggage compartment
accessibility, the electric loading aid makes
it possible to raise the open roof when it is
stowed in the luggage compartment.
36
Instruments
Instruments
Picture no: 17020t.tif
Control indicators
Control indicators ................................
Instrument display ...............................
Information display .............................
Radio reception 3................................
Remote control for Infotainment
system 3 and information display ..
Twin Audio 3 .......................................
Mobile telephones and radio
equipment 3......................................
Infotainment system 3........................
36
45
46
64
The control indicators described here are
not present in all vehicles. The descriptions
however, apply to all instrument versions.
64
64
Open&Start system 3
If it flashes:
System has not detected electronic key in
vehicle interior. The reasons for this may
be:
65
65
0
Picture no:
– The electronic key is in the wrong
location in the vehicle interior
(do not put key in luggage
compartment or in front of
information display), or the
electronic key is not in the vehicle
interior, or influence from an
external interference source
(radio masts, interfering
transmitters in the vicinity).
– or –
– Electronic key failure, for emergency
operation – see page 73.
If the battery in the electronic key needs
changing, InSP3 appears in the service
display or, in vehicles with check control 3,
by an appropriate message in the
information display – see pages 44, 74.
Instruments
If it illuminates:
Fault in Open&Start system.
Lock or unlock vehicle using remote control
or emergency key if necessary –
see page 80, or attempt to use the spare
key.
Emergency operation – see page 81.
If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that
the steering column is still locked: move
steering wheel to and fro a little and press
Start / Stop button again.
If 0 illuminates whilst driving a system
error has occurred that may eventually
lead to a complete failure.
If 0 illuminates or flashes: the Start / Stop
button must be held depressed slightly
longer to switch off the ignition. It is
possible that the vehicle will not start
during the next start attempt.
If 0 continues to flash or remains
illuminated, consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
I
Engine oil pressure
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
If it illuminates when the engine is running:
Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This
may result in damage to the engine and/or
locking of the drive wheels:
1. Depress clutch.
2. Shift manual transmission or
Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic
transmission 3, set selector lever to N.
3. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly
as possible without impeding other
vehicles.
4. Switch off ignition.
37
9 Warning
When the engine is off, considerably
more force is needed to brake and steer.
Do not remove key until vehicle has come
to a standstill, otherwise the steering
column lock could engage unexpectedly.
Check oil level before consulting a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
38
Instruments
v
Airbag systems 3,
belt tensioners,
deployable anti-roll bars 3
see pages 112, 121, 130.
v
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESP®Plus) 3
see page 208.
X
R
Picture no: 17020t.tif
Brake system,
clutch system
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on if the handbrake is
applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is
too low. Further information –
see pages 222, 296.
For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control
indicator flashes for a few seconds when
the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is
not applied.
Picture no:
9 Warning
If it illuminates when the handbrake is not
applied: stop the vehicle; interrupt your
journey immediately. Consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Seat belt 3
The control indicator illuminates after the
ignition is turned on until the seat belt is
fastened. When driving begins, the control
indicator flashes. Apply seat belt–
see page 113.
Q
Door open
Illuminated when a door or the luggage
compartment is open.
Instruments
p
Alternator
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
If it illuminates when the engine is running:
Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not
charged. Engine cooling may not be
operating. With a diesel engine the brake
servo unit may stop operating. Check the
drive belt before contacting a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
W
Coolant temperature
If it illuminates when the engine is running:
Stop, switch engine off. Coolant
temperature too high: danger of
engine damage. Check coolant level
immediately – see page 294.
A
IDS+
Interactive Driving System 3,
Continuous Damping Control (CDC) 3,
SPORT mode 3
IDS+ – see page 208,
CDC – see page 210,
SPORT mode – see page 210.
If it illuminates when the engine is running:
Fault in engine electronics or transmission
electronics. Electronics switch to
emergency running programme, fuel
consumption may increase and driveability
of the vehicle may be impaired –
see page 206. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Engine oil level 3
The engine oil level is checked1)
automatically.
Engine electronics,
Transmission electronics 3,
Electronic immobiliser,
Diesel fuel filter 3,
Fault
The control indicator illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on.
Illuminated together with InSP4 in the
service display: have the diesel fuel filter
drained of water – see page 294.
If it flashes when the ignition is on:
Fault in the electronic immobiliser system;
the engine cannot be started –
see page 67.
39
S
Illuminated: engine oil level too low. Check
engine oil level and top up if necessary –
see page 292.
8
Exterior lights
The control indicator is illuminated when
the exterior lights are on – see page 134.
r
Parking distance sensors 3,
see page 214.
1)
Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine.
Sales designation – see page 308.
40
Instruments
>
Front fog lights 3
The control indicator is illuminated when
the front fog lights are on – see page 135.
C
Main beam
The control indicator is illuminated when
main beam is on and during headlight
flash – see page 15.
r
O
Picture no: 17020t.tif
Y
Picture no:
Turn signal lights
The relevant control indicator flashes when
the turn signal is on. Rapid flash: failure of
a turn signal bulb or the corresponding
fuse or failure of a trailer turn signal bulb 3.
Both control indicators flash when the
hazard warning lights are active.
Fuel level
If it is illuminated: low fuel level. Fuel gauge
in reserve area.
Bulb replacement – see page 268.
Fuses – see page 261.
Petrol engines: erratic fuel supply can
cause catalytic converter to overheat –
see page 203.
If it flashes: fuel supply used up, fill tank
immediately.
Never let the tank run dry!
Diesel engines: if the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel system as described on page 243.
Fog tail light
The control indicator is illuminated when
the fog tail light is on – see page 135.
Instruments
T
Z
Winter programme of automatic
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3
Control indicator is illuminated when winter
programme is enabled.
Exhaust emission 3
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on and goes out shortly
after the engine starts.
Further information –
see pages 177, 185, 192.
1
If it illuminates when the engine is running:
Fault in emission control system. The
permitted emission limits may be
exceeded. Consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Further information –
see pages 176, 184, 191.
If it flashes when the engine is running:
Fault that can lead to destruction of the
catalytic converter is indicated –
see page 205. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3
The control indicator is illuminated when
SPORT mode is engaged.
y
Seat occupancy recognition 3,
see page 122.
u
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),
see page 224.
41
42
Instruments
B
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL),
Fault
If it is illuminated: System fault. In the event
of malfunction of the curve lighting pivot
function, the relevant dipped beam light is
deactivated. Consult a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
AFL – see page 137.
m
!
Picture no: 17020t.tif
Preheating system 3,
Diesel particle filter 3
Illuminated during preheating.
Preheating system switches on only if
outside temperature is low.
Flashing (in vehicles with diesel particle
filter): diesel particle filter requires
cleaning. As soon as the road and traffic
situation permits it, increase speed to more
than 25 mph (40 km/h) for a brief period.
The control indicator goes off as soon as
cleaning is complete.
w
Picture no:
Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3,
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3
Illuminated red:
Tyre pressure loss – see page 217.
Illuminated yellow:
Fault in system – see pages 217, 218.
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Cruise control 3,
see page 212.
Instruments
D
Automatic mode of
automatic transmission.
1-4
Current gear of
automatic transmission.
1-5
or
1-6 3 Manual mode, current gear with
Easytronic.
For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a
few seconds if A, M or R is selected when
the engine is running but the foot brake is
not depressed.
Picture no: 17022t.tif
Transmission display 3
Display of the selected gear position
with automatic transmission 3
or the selected gear with Easytronic 3:
P
Park position of automatic
transmission.
R
Reverse gear.
N
Neutral or idling position.
A
Automatic mode of Easytronic.
M
Manual mode of Easytronic.
43
44
Instruments
ESP off Electronic Stability
Programme 3
deactivated –
see page 208.
ESP on
Picture no: 17335t.tif.
Odometer display
Time display 3
To switch between trip odometer and time
display 3 give reset knob a short press.
Setting the time
With time displayed, press reset knob in
instrument:
Press for approx. 2 seconds:
Hours flash
Press briefly
Set hours
Press for approx. 2 seconds
Minutes flash
Press briefly
Set minutes
Press for approx. 2 seconds
Clock is started
Picture no: 17008t.tif
Service display
InSP Service interval display.
Shows remaining distance
until next service.
Further information – see page 290.
InSP2 Bulb failure 3 – see page 268.
InSP3 Remote control has
low battery voltage 3 –
see page 69.
InSP4 Water in diesel fuel filter 3.
Consult a workshop.
On vehicles with check control 3, a
message is shown on the display
instead of InSP2 and InSP3.
Electronic Stability
Programme 3
activated –
see page 208.
Instruments
Picture no: 17021t.tif
Instrument display
On some versions, the pointer of the
tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge
briefly moves to its end position when the
ignition is switched on.
Tachometer
Indicates engine speed.
Warning zone: maximum permissible
engine speed exceeded; danger to engine.
Speedometer
Indicates the vehicle speed.
Picture no:
Odometer
Records the miles (kilometres) driven.
Trip odometer
To reset, hold the reset knob depressed for
a few seconds with the ignition on.
Resetting in vehicles with clock display 3
in odometer:
If the clock display is active, first switch to
the odometer display. Then briefly press
the reset knob – see next page.
45
Picture no: 17023t.tif
Fuel gauge
Pointer in left
zone or
Y illuminated
Pointer in left
zone or
Y flashing
= Reserve area
= Fill up –
see page 201
Never run the tank dry!
Diesel engines: if the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel system as described on page 243.
Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
may be less than the specified tank
capacity.
46
Instruments
12:01 17 ,0°C
FM 3 90,6 MHz
REG
AS
RDS
TP
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Range
Range
RDS
[TP]
257miles
Picture no: 17336t.tif
Information display
Triple Information Display
Display of time, outside temperature and
date / Infotainment system (when it is on).
When the ignition is off, the time, date and
outside temperature can be presented for
15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the
two buttons below the display.
An F in the display indicates a fault.
Have the cause of the fault remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Board Information Display 3
Display of time, outside temperature and
date / Infotainment system (when it is on).
An F in the display indicates a fault.
Have the cause of the fault remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
23°
5
257 miles
7.6 miles/gal
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Graphical Information Display 3,
Colour Information Display 3
Display of time, outside temperature,
date / Infotainment system (when it is on)
and Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3.
The Graphical Information Display
presents the information in monochrome.
The Colour Information Display presents
the information in colour.
Instruments
The type of information and how it is
displayed depends on the equipment of
the vehicle and the settings of the trip
computer 3, Electronic Climate Control
(ECC) 3 and Infotainment system 3.
Some information appears in the display
in an abbreviated form.
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) –
see page 167.
:
8:56
-5 ,5°C
07.04.2004
Infotainment system –
see Infotainment system instructions.
An F in the display indicates a fault.
Have the cause of the fault remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
47
Slippery road
-2,5°C
OK
Picture no: 17336t.tif
Outside temperature
A fall in temperature is indicated
immediately and a rise in temperature
after a time delay.
If outside temperature drops to 3 °C,
the symbol : illuminates in the Triple
Information Display or the Board
Information Display 3 as a warning for
icy road surfaces. : remains illuminated
until temperatures reach at least 5 °C.
Picture no: 17338t.tif
In vehicles with Graphical Information
Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3,
a warning message appears the display as
a warning for icy road surfaces. There is no
message below -5 °C.
9 Warning
Caution: the road surface may already
be icy even though the display indicates
a few degrees above 0 °C.
48
Instruments
8:56
5 ,5°C
07.04.2004
Picture no: 17024t.tif
Triple Information Display
Setting date and time
Infotainment system off: press Ö and ;
below the display as follows:
Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds:
Day flashes
;: Set day
Ö: Month flashes
;: Set month
Ö: Year flashes
;: Set year
Ö: Hours flash
;: Set hours
Ö: Minutes flash
;: Set minutes
Ö: Clock is started
Correcting time 3
Some RDS transmitters do not send a
correct time signal. If the incorrect time is
continually displayed, switch off automatic
time synchronisation 3 and set the time
manually - see next column.
The automatic setting is indicated by } in
the display.
Deactivating / activating automatic time
synchronisation: Infotainment system off,
press Ö and ; below the display:
Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock
display is now in setting mode.
Press Ö twice (until year flashes).
Press Ö and hold down for approx.
3 seconds until } flashes in display 3
and "RDS TIME" appears (years flash
during this time).
Press ;, display indicates:
RDS TIME 0 = Off.
Press ;, display indicates:
RDS TIME 1 = On.
Press Ö three times.
Instruments
11:25 }
49
21 .5°C
Range
257miles
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Board Information Display 3,
selecting functions
Functions and settings of some
equipment 3 can be accessed via
the Board Information Display.
This is done via the menus and the
buttons / four-way button on the
Infotainment system 3 or with the left
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
The relevant menu options are then shown
on the subsequent row of the display.
Picture no: 17012t.tif
Select options via the menus and with
the buttons / four-way button on the
Infotainment system 3.
Picture no: 17014t.tif
Menu options can also be selected with the
left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
The relevant menu options are then shown
on the subsequent row of the display.
If check control 3 issues a warning
message, the display is blocked from other
functions. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the right or left button of the fourway button or by pressing the left adjuster
wheel 3 on the steering wheel. If there are
several warning messages, acknowledge
them one at a time.
System settings – see page 50.
Trip computer – see page 52.
50
Instruments
The functions are displayed in the following
order:
11:25 }
21 .5°C
System
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Board Information Display 3,
system settings
Press the Settings button of the
Infotainment system. Menu item Audio or
System will appear.
Press the lower button of the four-way
button to reach menu item System. After
pressing the right-hand part of the fourway button, the first function of the System
menu is shown.
Some of the functions appear on the
display in an abbreviated form.
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Time synchronisation
Time, setting hours
Time, setting minutes
Date, setting day
Date, setting month
Date, setting year
Ignition logic
Language selection
Setting units of measure
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Clock Sync.On
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Correcting time 3
Some RDS transmitters do not send a
correct time signal. If the incorrect time is
continually displayed, deactivate
automatic time synchronisation 3 and set
the time manually – see next page.
Instruments
51
The automatic setting is indicated by } in
the display.
To correct time with the help of RDS, select
the menu item for time synchronisation
from the Settings menu.
Make the desired setting.
Setting date and time
Select the menu item for time and date
setting from the Settings menu.
11:25 }
21 .5°C
English
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Unit Europe-SI
Make the desired setting.
The setting is saved when the menu item is
exited.
Ignition logic 3
See Infotainment system instructions.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Language selection
You can select the display language for
some functions.
Setting units of measure
You can select which units of measure are
to be used.
Select the menu item for language from the
Settings menu and make the desired
setting.
Select the menu item for units of measure
from the Settings menu and make the
desired setting.
52
Instruments
Board Information Display 3,
trip computer 3
The trip computer provides information on
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically.
Access trip computer vehicle data by
pressing the BC button on the Infotainment
system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the
steering wheel.
Some of the functions appear on the
display in an abbreviated form.
Once an audio function has been selected,
the subsequent rows of the trip computer
function are displayed.
The functions are displayed in the following
order:
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Instantaneous consumption
Average consumption
Effective consumption
Average speed
Distance travelled
Range
Stop watch
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Average consumption
Displays average consumption.
Calculation can be restarted at any time –
see next page.
Inst. Consumpt.
Effective consumption
Displays amount of fuel consumed.
Calculation can be restarted at any time –
see next page.
7.6 miles/gal
Average speed
Displays average speed. Calculation can
be restarted at any time - see next page.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
off are not included in the calculations.
Instantaneous consumption
Display changes depending on speed:
Display in gal/h
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Display in mpg
above 8 mph (13 km/h).
Distance travelled
Displays number of miles (kilometres)
driven. Calculation can be restarted at any
time – see next page.
Instruments
11:25 }
21 .5°C
11:25 }
21 .5°C
Range
Stop Watch
257miles
01:22:32 h
Picture no: 17337t.tif
Range
Range is calculated from current fuel tank
content and instantaneous consumption.
The display shows average values.
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
range automatically after a brief delay.
If the fuel in the tank will allow less than
30 miles (50 km) of travel, the warning
"Range" appears on the display.
Picture no: 17337t.tif
53
Resetting trip computer information
The following trip computer information
can be reset (restart of measurement /
calculation):
z
z
z
z
Average consumption
Effective consumption
Average speed
Distance travelled
Select the desired trip computer
information.
Reset by pressing the left adjuster wheel on
the steering wheel or the right or left button
on the four-way button:
Stop watch
Operation with the four-way button:
Press for more than
2 seconds
Current value
Press right button
Start / Stop
Press left button
at least 2 seconds
Press for more than
4 seconds
All values
Reset
Interruption of power supply
If the power supply has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage has dropped too low,
the values stored in the trip computer will
be lost.
Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3
on the steering wheel:
Press
Start / Stop
54
Instruments
Range
Inst. consumpt.
19,5°
23°
5
257 miles
7.6 miles/gal
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Graphical Information Display 3
or Colour Information Display 3,
selecting functions
The functions and settings of some
equipment 3 can be accessed via the
Graphical Information Display or the
Colour Information Display.
Functions are selected and executed in the
menu on the display using the four-way
button, the multi-function button 3 on the
Infotainment system or the left wheel 3
on the steering wheel.
Picture no: 17012t.tif
Picture no: 17013t.tif
To select with four-way button:
To select using the multi-function button:
Select menu items via menus and with
the buttons / four-way button of the
Infotainment system.
Turn
Mark menu items
or commands, select
functions.
If check control 3 issues a warning
message, the display is blocked from other
functions. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the right or left portion of the fourway button. If there are several warning
messages, acknowledge them one at a
time.
Press
Select marked item,
confirm command.
To exit a menu, turn the multi-function
button left or right to Return or Main and
select.
If check control 3 issues a warning
message, the display is blocked from other
functions. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the multi-function button. If
there are several warning messages,
acknowledge them one at a time.
Instruments
7
FM AS
[TP]
REG
CDin
MP3
Settings
Time, Date
55
19,5° 19:36
19:36
Language
�
90.6 MHz
Units
10 . 07 . 2004
Contrast
Day / Night
19,5°
Picture no: 17014t.tif
To select using the left adjuster wheel 3 on
the steering wheel:
Turn up
Previous
menu item
Turn down
Next
menu item
Press
Select marked item,
confirm command
If check control 3 issues a warning
message, the display is blocked from other
functions. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the left adjuster wheel. If there are
several warning messages, acknowledge
them one at a time.
19:36
Picture no: 17331t.tif
For each functional area there is a main
page (Main), which is selected at the
top edge of the display (not with the
Infotainment system CD 30 or the
Mobile Phone Portal):
z
z
z
z
Audio,
Navigation 3,
Telephone 3,
Trip computer 3.
For Audio, Navigation 3 and Telephone 3
functions – see Infotainment system
instructions.
6 Ign. logic
Picture no: 17332t.tif
System settings
The settings are accessed via the Settings
menu.
Press the Main button 3 (not found on all
Infotainment systems) on the Infotainment
system (call up main display).
Press the Settings button of the
Infotainment system. On Infotainment
System CD 30, make sure no menu has
been selected.
The Settings menu is displayed.
56
Instruments
7
Time, Date
19,5° 19:36
Time
19:36
Date
10 . 07 . 2004
6 Synchron. clock automatical.
Picture no: 17340t.tif
Setting date and time
Select menu item Time, Date from the
Settings menu.
The menu for Time, Date is displayed.
Correcting time 3
In systems with GPS receiver1), date and
time are set automatically upon receipt of
a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time
does not match local time, it can be
corrected manually or automatically by
receiving an RDS time signal2) 3.
Some RDS transmitters do not send correct
time signals. If the incorrect time is
displayed often, deactivate automatic
time synchronisation 3 and set the time
manually.
To correct time with the help of RDS, select
menu item Synchron. clock automatical.
from the Time, Date menu.
The box in front of Synchron. clock
automatical. will be ticked;
see Fig. 17340 T.
Select the menu items required:
7
Settings
19,5° 19:36
Time, Date
Language
Deutsch
Units
English
Contrast
Español
Day / Night
...
6 Ign. logic
Picture no: 17341t.tif
Language selection
You can select the display language for
some functions.
Select menu item Language from the
Settings menu.
The available languages are displayed.
Make the desired setting.
1)
GPS = Global Positioning System,
2)
RDS = Radio Data System.
satellite system for world-wide positioning.
Instruments
7
13 Languages
19,5° 19:36
X Deutsch
7
Settings
19,5° 19:36
Language
~
Europe-SI
Español
Units
Japan
Dutch
Contrast
|
|
|
French
Day / Night
Italiano
6 Ign. logic
Picture no: 17342t.tif
Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of
the menu item.
In systems with voice output 3, when the
language setting of the display is changed
the system will ask whether the
announcement language should also be
changed – see Infotainment system
instructions.
Contrast
19,5° 19:36
Time, Date
English
Select the desired language.
7
12
Great Britain
USA
Picture no: 17343t.tif
Setting units of measure
You can select which units of measure are
to be used.
Select menu item Units from the Settings
menu.
The available units are displayed.
Select the desired unit.
Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the menu item.
57
Picture no: 17926t.tif
Adjusting contrast 3
(Graphical Information Display)
Select menu item Contrast from the
Settings menu.
The menu for Contrast is displayed.
Confirm the required setting.
58
Instruments
Setting display mode 3
The display can be adjusted to suit the light
conditions, black or coloured text on a light
background or white or coloured text on a
dark background.
Select menu item Day / Night from the
Settings menu.
The options are displayed.
Automatic: adapted based on vehicle
lighting.
Always day design: black or coloured text
on light background.
Always night design: white or coloured
text on dark background.
Selections are indicated by a o in front
of the menu item.
Ignition logic 3
See Infotainment system instructions.
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
19,5° 19:36
All values
257.0
Ø 40
31.0
Ø 7.0
Range
257 miles
miles
mph
Inst. consumpt.
7.6 miles/gal
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17344t.tif
Graphical Information Display 3
or Colour Information Display 3,
trip computer 3
The trip computers provide information on
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically.
The trip computer main page provides
information on range and instantaneous
consumption.
To display other trip computer data,
press the BC button on the Infotainment
system 3, select the trip computer menu
front the display or press the left adjuster
wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
19,5°
23°
5
Eco
x
19:36
Picture no: 17329t.tif
Range
Range is calculated from current fuel tank
content and instantaneous consumption.
The display shows average values.
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
range automatically after a brief delay.
Instruments
Distance travelled
Shows the number of miles (kilometres)
travelled. The measurement can be
restarted at any time.
Ü Board Computer
Average speed
Calculation of average consumption. The
measurement can be restarted at any time.
Range
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
off are not included in the calculations.
33miles
Tyres
Effective consumption
Shows the amount of fuel consumed. The
measurement can be restarted at any time.
OK
Picture no: 17345t.tif
If the fuel in the tank will allow less than
30 miles (50 km) of travel, the warning
"Range" appears on the display.
Acknowledge the menu item as described
on page 54.
Instantaneous consumption
Display changes depending on speed:
Display in gal/h
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Display in mpg
above 8 mph (13 km/h).
Average consumption
Calculation of average consumption.
The measurement can be restarted
at any time.
59
19,5° 19:36
All values
257.0
Ø 40
Ø
31.0
7.0
miles
mph
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17344t.tif
Resetting trip computer information
The following trip computer information
can be reset (restart measurements):
z
z
z
z
distance
average speed
effective consumption
average consumption
Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
menu.
60
Instruments
Ü Reset BC 1
19,5° 19:36
257.0
Ø 40
Ø
31.0
7.0
Ü Reset BC 1
19,5° 19:36
All values
All values
miles
mph
257.0
Ø 40
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17346t.tif
The information of the two trip computers
can be reset separately, making it possible
to evaluate data from different time
periods.
Select the desired trip computer
information.
The value for the selected function will be
reset and recalculated.
Ø
31.0
7.0
miles
mph
gal
miles/gal
Picture no: 17347t.tif
To reset all information of a trip computer,
select menu item All values.
After resetting, "- - -" is displayed for the
trip computer information selected. The
recalculated values are displayed after a
brief delay.
Interruption of power supply
If the power supply has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage has dropped too low,
the values stored in the trip computer will
be lost.
Instruments
61
The desired stop watch display can be
selected from the Options menu 3:
Ü Board Computer
19,5° 19:36
BC 1
00:00:00
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Start
Reset
Options
Picture no: 17348t.tif
Stop watch
Driving Time excl. Stops
The time the vehicle is in motion is
recorded. Stationary time is not included.
Driving Time incl. Stops
The time the vehicle is in motion is
recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary
with the key in the starter switch is
included.
Travel Time
Measurement of the time from manual
activation via Start to manual deactivation
via Reset.
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Picture no: 17334t.tif
Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Timer from the Board
Computer menu.
Select menu item Tyres from the Board
Computer menu.
The Timer menu is displayed.
The current pressure of each tyre is
displayed.
To start, select menu item Start.
To reset, select menu item Reset.
Further information – see page 218.
62
Instruments
Check control 3
Check control monitors several fluid levels,
tyre pressure 3, the radio frequency
remote control batteries, Vauxhall alarm
system 3, and important external lights,
including cables and fuses. When towing,
trailer lighting is also monitored.
Warning messages appear on the display.
If there are several warning messages, they
are displayed one after the other.
Some of the warning messages appear on
the display in an abbreviated form.
Examples of warning messages for the
Graphical Information Display 3 and
Colour Information Display 3 are depicted.
On the Board Information Display,
messages appear in an abbreviated form.
Acknowledge warning messages
as described on pages 49, 54.
Unacknowledged warning messages
can be re-displayed later.
Coolant level
check
Warning messages:
Remote Control
Battery
check
Battery voltage of remote control or
electronic key of Open&Start system too
low – see page 69.
OK
Picture no: 17339t.tif
Brakelight switch
check
Fault. Brake light does not come on when
brake applied. Have cause of fault
remedied immediately. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Safeguard
check
Fault. System error in Vauxhall alarm
system. Have cause of fault remedied
immediately. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Instruments
If there is a fault in the lighting system, the
respective location of the fault is displayed
as text, e.g.:
Brakelight
check right
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the
display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.:
Tyre pressure
check rear
right tyre
(value in psi / bar)
Check tyre pressure at next opportunity
using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure
monitoring system 3 – see page 218.
Checking tyre pressure – see page 326.
In vehicles with tyre pressure control
system 3, if there is major loss of pressure
in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at
fault, e.g.:
Attention!
Rear left tyre
pressure loss
(value in psi / bar)
Stop immediately and check tyre. Tyre
pressure monitoring system 3 –
see page 218.
63
Wash fluid level
check
Fluid level in windscreen wash system
too low. Topping up wash fluid –
see page 299.
Rear window wash system and headlight
wash system 3 are deactivated if wash
fluid level is low.
Coolant level
check
Fluid level in engine cooling system is low.
Check coolant level immediately –
see page 294.
Interruption of power supply
Stored warning messages appear on
the display one after the other.
64
Instruments
Radio reception 3
Car radio reception differs from domestic
radio reception:
As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the
ground, the broadcasting companies
cannot guarantee the same quality of
reception as obtained with a domestic
radio using an overhead antenna.
z Changes in distance from the
transmitter,
z multi-path reception due to reflection
and
z shadowing
may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss
of reception altogether.
Picture no: 17015t.tif
Remote control for Infotainment
system 3 and information display
The functions of the Infotainment system 3
and the information display can be
operated with the buttons on the steering
wheel.
Further information – see page 49 and
the relevant operating instructions.
Picture no: 17026t.tif
Twin Audio 3
Twin Audio provides rear seat occupants
the opportunity to listen to a different
audio source than the one selected by the
driver on the Infotainment system.
Only an audio source that is not currently
active on the Infotainment system can be
controlled using Twin Audio.
Two headphone connections are available,
with separate volume controls.
Further information is available in the
Infotainment system operating
instructions.
Instruments
Mobile telephones and radio
equipment 3
The Vauxhall installation instructions and
the operating guidelines provided by the
telephone manufacturer must be observed
when fitting and operating a mobile
telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate
the vehicle’s operating permit (EU Directive
95/54/EG).
Prerequisites for fault-free operation:
z professionally installed exterior antenna
to obtain the maximum range possible,
z maximum transmission power 10 Watt,
z installation of the telephone in a suitable
spot (see information on page 124).
Obtain advice on predetermined
installation locations for the external
antenna and equipment holder and ways
of using devices with transmission power of
more than 10 Watts. We recommend that
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will have brackets and
various installation kits available as
accessories and will install them in
accordance with regulations.
65
For reasons of safety, we recommend that
you do not use the phone while driving.
Even use of a hands-free set can be a
distraction while driving. Be sure to observe
any country-specific regulations.
9 Warning
When used in the vehicle interior, mobile
telephones and radio equipment (CB)
with integrated antenna may cause
malfunctions in the vehicle electronics.
Mobile telephones and radio equipment
(CB) should only be used with an antenna
fitted on the vehicle exterior.
Infotainment system 3
The Infotainment system is operated as
described in the operating instructions.
66
Keys, doors, bonnet
Keys, doors, bonnet
Replacement keys
The key is a constituent of the electronic
immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer guarantees problemfree operation of the electronic
immobiliser.
When electronic keys of the Open&Start
system are being replaced, all keys must be
handed to the dealer for programming.
Keep the spare key in a safe spot.
Electronic immobiliser..........................
Radio frequency remote control 3
with mechanical key .........................
Open&Start system 3 ..........................
Central locking system ........................
Fault when locking or unlocking.........
Luggage compartment.......................
Vauxhall alarm system 3....................
Child safety locks.................................
Bonnet ..................................................
67
68
70
76
80
81
83
86
86
Locks – see page 305,
Open&Start system, electronic keys –
see page 70.
Lock cylinders
Designed to free-wheel if they are
forcefully rotated without the correct key or
if the correct key is not fully inserted.
To reset, turn cylinder with the correct key
until its slot is vertical, remove key and then
re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels,
turn the key through 180° and repeat
operation.
Car Pass
The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s
data and should therefore not be kept in
the vehicle.
Have your Car Pass to hand when
consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17027t.tif
Key with foldaway key section 3
Press button to extend. Press button to
retract; key section engages audibly.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 17349t.tif
Electronic immobiliser
The system checks whether the vehicle
may be started with the mechanical key or
electronic key of the Open&Start system 3
that is being used. If the key is recognised
as "authorised" the vehicle can be started.
The check takes place via a transponder in
the key.
The electronic immobiliser activates itself
automatically after the key has been
removed from the ignition or, with the
Open&Start system 3, when the engine is
switched off by pressing the Start / Stop
button.
Picture no: 17033t.tif
Control indicator for electronic
immobiliser
Control indicator A illuminates briefly
when the ignition is switched on.
If the control indicator flashes when the
ignition is on, there is a fault in the system;
the engine cannot be started. Switch off
the ignition and then repeat the start
attempt.
If control indicator A continues to flash,
try to start the engine using the spare key
and consult a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
67
Picture no: 17028t.tif
If control indicator A illuminates after
the engine is started, there is a fault in
the engine electronics or
transmission electronics 3 (see pages 180,
186, 194, 206) or there is water in the diesel
fuel filter 3 (see page 294).
Note
The electronic immobiliser does not lock
the doors. Therefore, after leaving the
vehicle always lock it and switch on the
Vauxhall alarm system 3 –
see pages 76, 83.
68
Keys, doors, bonnet
Store and activate personal vehicle
settings using the remote control
The climate control and instrument
illumination settings are automatically
stored specifically for the vehicle key used.
Different settings are stored for each
remote control. Use of a remote control will
activate the settings associated with it.
Central locking system,
mechanical anti-theft locking system,
see page 76.
Picture no: 17029t.tif
Radio frequency remote control 3
with mechanical key
Radio frequency remote control in version
with Open&Start system – see page 70.
The remote control is integrated in the key.
Used to operate:
z central locking system,
z mechanical anti-theft locking system,
z Vauxhall alarm system 3.
The windows of vehicles with electrically
operated windows in all doors 3 can also
be opened or closed from outside using the
remote control - see page 79.
On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be
opened or closed with the remote control.
Picture no: 17030t.tif
The radio frequency remote control has a
range of approx. 3 metres. This range can
be affected by outside influences. Aim the
remote control at the vehicle to operate.
Handle the remote control with care,
protect it from moisture and high
temperatures and avoid unnecessary
operation.
The hazard warning lights come on to
indicate that the remote control is
operational.
Vauxhall alarm system 3,
see page 83.
Electrically operated door windows 3,
see page 141.
Astra TwinTop,
see page 146.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Fault
If the central locking system cannot be
operated with the radio frequency remote
control, it may be due to the following:
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in accordance with environmental
protection regulations.
Key with fixed key section
Entrust battery replacement to a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
z The range of the remote control has
been exceeded.
z Remote control battery voltage is too
low. Battery replacement –
see next column.
z Frequent, repeated operation of the
remote control outside the reception
range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from
vehicle, remote control is then no longer
recognised). Remote control
synchronisation - see right-hand column.
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
supply is cut off for a brief period.
z Interference from higher-power radio
waves from other sources.
To eliminate the cause of the fault,
contact your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Open driver’s door with key –
see next pages.
69
Radio frequency remote control
synchronisation
After changing the battery, unlock the
door with the key in the lock see next page.
Picture no: 17031t.tif
Remote control battery replacement
Key with foldaway key section
Replace the battery as soon as the range
of the remote control begins to shrink.
Extending the key – see page 66.
Open the remote control. Replace the
battery (battery type – see page 335),
noting installation position. Close the
remote control.
Inserting the key in the ignition lock
synchronises the remote control.
70
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 17333t.tif
Open&Start system 3
The Open&Start system allows the vehicle
to be locked and unlocked,
(including the anti-theft locking system
and the Vauxhall alarm system 3),
and the engine to be started and stopped
without a mechanical key. All the driver has
to do is keep the key on his person.
The windows of vehicles with electrically
operated windows in all doors 3 can also
be opened or closed from outside using the
remote control of the electronic key see page 79.
On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be
opened or closed with the remote control of
the electronic key.
Picture no: 17032t.tif
The electronic key must be within the
external reception range about 1 metre
from the vehicle in order to lock and unlock
the vehicle.
If the electronic key is recognized as
"authorised", the vehicle can be unlocked
by pulling a door handle or the button
beneath the tailgate handle and the doors
and the tailgate can be opened.
Picture no: 17033t.tif
When the Start / Stop button is pressed,
the system re-checks the authorisation.
The electronic key has to be recognised
in the interior in order to do this. After
the key has been authorised, the ignition
switches on. At the same time, the
electronic immobiliser is switched off and
the electro-mechanical steering column
lock is released.
Pressing the Start / Stop button again with
the brake or clutch pedal depressed or in P
or N with automatic transmission 3 starts
the engine. Press the button for at least one
second with the vehicle stationary or hold
until the engine starts.
Keys, doors, bonnet
71
If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed,
the engine can be started right away with
a single press on the Start / Stop button.
Releasing the Start / Stop button interrupts
the starting procedure.
The engine and the ignition are switched
off by pressing the Start / Stop button
again. The vehicle must be stationary. The
immobiliser is activated at the same time.
If the ignition has been switched off and
the vehicle is stationary, the steering
column lock activates automatically when
the driver’s door is opened or closed.
The electronic key must be within the
interior reception in order to switch the
ignition on or off. We recommend that
the driver carries the electronic key on his
or her person. If the electronic key is not
recognised, try a different position for
the key.
Do not put the electronic key in the
luggage compartment or in front of the
information display.
Picture no: 17034t.tif
The vehicle is locked from the outside with
the doors closed by touching the sensor
panel in the door handle of one of the front
doors. The electronic key must be within
the external reception range of
approximately one metre from the vehicle.
The Open&Start system 3 does not the lock
the vehicle automatically if the electronic
key is outside the external reception range
of approximately one metre from the
vehicle.
Picture no: 17035t.tif
Radio frequency remote control
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by
conventional means using the remote
control with the buttons on the electronic
key.
In addition, the anti-theft locking system
and Vauxhall alarm system can be armed
and disabled using the remote control.
The windows of vehicles with electrically
operated windows in all doors 3 can also
be opened or closed from outside using the
remote control.
6
72
Keys, doors, bonnet
The remote control has a range of approx.
3 metres. This range can be affected by
outside influences. Aim the remote control
at the vehicle to operate.
If the control indicator 0 is permanently
on, an error has occurred in the system.
Lock or unlock vehicle using the radio
frequency remote control or the emergency
key if necessary – see page 80, or try using
the spare key.
Handle the remote control with care,
protect it from moisture and high
temperatures and avoid unnecessary
operation.
If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that
the steering column is still locked: move
steering wheel to and fro a little and press
Start / Stop button again.
The hazard warning lights come on to
indicate that the remote control is
operational.
Storing and retrieving personal vehicle
settings with the electronic key
The climate control and instrument
illumination settings are automatically
stored specifically for the vehicle key used.
Different settings are stored for each
electronic key. Use of an electronic key will
activate the settings associated with it.
Central locking system,
mechanical anti-theft locking system,
see page 76.
Vauxhall alarm system 3,
see page 83.
Electrically operated door windows 3,
see page 141.
Astra TwinTop,
see page 146.
Picture no: 17036t.tif
Control indicator for Open&Start
system 0
If the control indicator 0 flashes with
the ignition switched on or with the engine
running an operating error has occurred,
e.g. the electronic key is no longer within
the reception range of the vehicle interior.
During the next starting procedure the
engine may not be able to be started. Press
Start / Stop key slightly longer to switch the
ignition off.
Flashing of 0 can also be an indication of
complete failure of the electronic key. In
this case operation is only possible using
the emergency facility – see page 73.
InSP3 in the service display or an
appropriate message in the information 3
display indicates that the battery of the
electronic key needs replacing –
see page 74.
Illumination of 0 whilst driving indicates
a system fault. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Emergency operation – see page 73.
Lockable glove compartment,
Astra TwinTop with Open&Start system 3
In addition to the electronic key of the
Open&Start system, there is a standard key
without remote control for the glove
compartment lock.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 17037t.tif
Emergency operation
If the Open&Start system or the electronic
key fails (control indicator 0 flashes or is
permanently on) the driver’s door can be
locked or unlocked with the emergency key
in the electronic key: press locking
mechanism on underside and remove cap
toward the front by applying gentle
pressure to the cap. Push emergency key
towards the outside over the detent and
remove.
Picture no: 17038t.tif
Only the driver’s door can be locked and
unlocked using the emergency key. Unlock
the entire vehicle as described on page 80.
In model variants with Vauxhall alarm
system 3, the alarm may be triggered
when the vehicle is unlocked. Switch
ignition on to deactivate alarm and release
the steering column lock: hold electronic
key at marked position (see Fig. 17039T in
next column) on the steering column
panelling and press the Start / Stop button.
Repeat procedure if necessary.
73
Picture no: 17039t.tif
To start the engine, hold the electronic key
at the marked position, depress brake
pedal or clutch pedal or in vehicles with
automatic transmission 3 depress brake
pedal and engage P or N, then press the
Start / Stop button.
Press Start / Stop button for at least 1
second to switch the engine off. Lock all
doors except driver’s door as described on
page 80. Unlock driver’s door with
emergency key.
This facility is only intended for
emergencies. Replace battery in electronic
key at the earliest opportunity or have the
system repaired. Consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
74
Keys, doors, bonnet
Radio frequency remote control
synchronisation
The remote control synchronises itself
automatically during every starting
procedure.
Picture no: 17040t.tif
Replacing battery in electronic key
Replace the battery immediately if the
system is no longer working properly or
the range of the radio frequency remote
control is reducing. The need for a battery
change is indicated via InSP3 in the service
display or, in vehicles with check control 3,
by an appropriate message in the display see page 44.
Picture no: 17041t.tif
To replace the battery, press the locking
mechanism on the underside of the
electronic key and remove the cover
towards the front by applying gentle
pressure - see page 73, Fig. 17037 T. Push
off cover with emblem on the button side
towards the outside.
Replace battery, for battery type –
see page 335, pay attention to installation
position. Engage caps.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Fault in Open&Start system or radio
frequency remote control
If the central locking cannot be operated or
the engine cannot be started, the cause
may be one of the following:
z Electronic key out of reception range, or
out of range of remote control.
z Remote control battery voltage too low –
see previous page for instructions on
how to change battery.
z Frequent, repeated operation of the
remote control outside the reception
range (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote
control is then no longer recognised).
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
supply is cut off for a brief period.
z Interference from higher-power radio
waves from other sources.
To remedy the cause of the problem, move
electronic key or remote control to another
location or change the remote control
battery. If the problem persists we
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Emergency operation – see page 73.
75
76
Keys, doors, bonnet
Securing with mechanical anti-theft
locking system
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from inside.
Picture no: 17042t.tif
Central locking system
For doors, boot lid / tailgate and tank flap.
To lock
Radio frequency remote control with
mechanical key
Press button p on remote control.
Picture no: 17034t.tif
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
The electronic key must be outside of the
vehicle. There must not be any electronic
key in the vehicle interior. All of the doors
and the luggage compartment are locked
by touching the sensor in the handle of the
driver’s or front passenger’s door
– or –
by pressing button p of the electronic
key’s remote control.
Keys, doors, bonnet
77
Press button p of the electronic key’s
remote control again.
If the ignition was on, the driver’s door
must be opened and closed once so that
the vehicle can be secured.
Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
such that doors cannot be opened.
Picture no: 17043t.tif
Radio frequency remote control with
mechanical key
All doors must be closed. At the latest
15 seconds after locking, press button p
of the remote control again.
Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
such that doors cannot be opened.
If the ignition was on, the driver’s door
must be opened and closed once so that
the vehicle can be secured.
Picture no: 17044t.tif
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
All doors must be closed. The electronic key
must be outside of the vehicle. No more
than 15 seconds after locking, touch the
sensor in the handle of the driver’s or front
passenger’s door again
– or –
78
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 16968t.tif
To unlock
Remote control with mechanical key
Press button q on remote control.
Picture no: 17032t.tif
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
The electronic key must be outside of the
vehicle. The vehicle is unlocked by pulling
a door handle or operating the button
beneath the tailgate handle
– or –
by pressing button q of the electronic
key’s remote control.
Picture no: 17045t.tif
Central locking switch for locking and
unlocking the doors from inside the
vehicle
Press button m in the centre console: doors
are locked or unlocked.
If the key is in the ignition, locking is only
possible if all doors are closed.
When the mechanical anti-theft locking
system is active – see previous page – the
doors cannot be unlocked with this button.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Note
z If the driver’s door is not closed properly,
the central locking system will not lock.
z The LED in the central locking switch m
comes on for around 2 minutes after
locking.
z To lock the doors from within
(e.g. to prevent unwanted entry from
outside), press central locking switch m
in the centre console.
z With the Open&Start system 3 the vehicle
cannot be unlocked until 2 seconds after
locking. Within this time, a door handle
can be pulled or the button beneath the
tailgate handle operated to check
whether the vehicle is locked.
z After unlocking with the key in the lock
and opening the driver’s door, the entire
vehicle is unlocked.
z If locked via the central locking system,
the doors can also be opened by pulling
the inside door handles. The central
locking system is also unlocked at this
time (not possible on Astra TwinTop
when the roof is open).
z Locked doors unlock automatically in
the event of an accident of a certain
severity (to allow external help to gain
access). The hazard warning lights and
courtesy light also come on. For this to
occur, the key must be in the starter
switch.
z The Open&Start system 3 does not lock
the vehicle automatically if the electronic
key is outside the reception range of the
vehicle (more than 1 metre away from
the vehicle).
z When using the Open&Start system 3,
there must not be an electronic key
inside the vehicle when locking.
z The locking sensors in the door handles
must be kept clean to ensure
unrestricted functionality of the
Open&Start system 3.
79
Picture no: 17046t.tif
Operating the windows 3 from the
outside
9 Warning
Take care when operating the electrically
operated door windows. Risk of injury,
particularly to children.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Keep a close watch on the windows
when closing them. Ensure that nothing
becomes trapped in them as they move.
The windows of vehicles with electrically
operated windows in all doors 3 can also
be opened or closed from outside:
6
80
Keys, doors, bonnet
Overload
The power supply is cut off for a brief
period if the central locking system is
repeatedly operated at short intervals.
The system is protected by a fuse in the
fusebox – see page 261.
Further information on windows with
electric drive – see page 143.
Picture no: 17034t.tif
Radio frequency remote control with
mechanical key
Hold button q or p on the remote control
depressed until all windows have opened
or completely closed.
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Hold down button q of remote control to
open. To close, hold down button p or
touch sensor in door handle for longer. The
electronic key must be recognised within
the external reception range. It is advisable
for the driver to keep the electronic key on
his person.
Further information on windows –
see page 141.
Picture no: 17047t.tif
Fault when locking or unlocking
Fault in radio frequency remote control or
Open&Start system
To unlock
Turn key or emergency key for Open&Start
system (see page 73) towards front of
vehicle in the driver’s door lock as far as it
will go. Return key to a vertical position and
remove. The entire vehicle is unlocked
when the driver’s door is opened.
Keys, doors, bonnet
Luggage compartment
For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after
opening the driver’s door, press the central
locking switch m in the centre console. The
vehicle will then be unlocked, provided the
anti-theft locking system is not engaged.
Switch on the ignition to deactivate the
Vauxhall alarm system 3. Emergency
operation of the Open&Start system –
see page 73.
To lock
Open passenger’s door, close driver’s door,
press central locking switch m in centre
console. Central locking system locks all
doors. Close passenger’s door.
Malfunction in central locking system
To unlock
Turn key or emergency key with
Open&Start system – see page 73, towards
front of vehicle in the driver’s door lock as
far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertical
position and remove. The other doors can
be opened by pulling the handle on the
inside of the doors (not possible if anti-theft
locking system enabled beforehand). The
luggage compartment and the fuel filler
cap remain locked. To deactivate the
anti-theft locking system, switch ignition on
– see page 14.
81
To unlock
Radio frequency remote control with
mechanical key
Press button q of remote control, the
luggage compartment is unlocked
together with the doors and can be opened
by pulling the button beneath the handle.
Picture no: 17048t.tif
To lock
Insert the key or emergency key for
Open&Start system (see page 73) into the
opening above the lock on the inside of the
door and press until the lock audibly
engages. Then close the door. The
procedure must be repeated for each door.
The driver’s door can also be locked from
outside using the lock. The unlocked fuel
filler flap and tailgate / boot lid cannot be
locked.
Emergency operation of Open&Start
system 3,
see page 73.
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
The luggage compartment and the doors
can be unlocked and opened by operating
the button beneath the handle if the
electronic key is recognised outside of the
vehicle
– or –
by pressing button q of the electronic
key’s remote control.
82
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 16969t.tif
To open
The luggage compartment is opened by
operating the button beneath the handle.
Open luggage compartment
9 Warning
Do not drive with the tailgate open or
ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky
objects, since toxic exhaust gas could
penetrate the interior.
Fitting of accessories on the tailgate will
increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy,
the tailgate will then not stay open.
Picture no: 17049t.tif
Picture no: 17029t.tif
To close
There is a handle on the inside of the
tailgate for closing the luggage
compartment.
To lock
Radio frequency remote control with
mechanical key
Press button p on remote control.
Do not operate the button beneath the
handle when closing. Otherwise the
luggage compartment will once again be
unlocked.
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Press button p of the electronic key remote
control or touch sensor in handle of one of
the front doors. The electronic key must be
recognised in the external reception area.
It is advisable for the driver to keep the
electronic key on his person.
Keys, doors, bonnet
83
Vauxhall alarm system 3
monitors
z the doors, luggage compartment,
bonnet,
z the passenger’s compartment,
z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from the inside.
Picture no: 17043t.tif
To activate
Remote control with mechanical key
All doors, windows, the sunroof 3 and the
bonnet must be closed. Within 15 seconds
of locking, press button p on the remote
control again.
If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s
door must be opened and closed so that
the Vauxhall alarm system can be
switched on.
Picture no: 17044t.tif
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
The doors, the windows and the bonnet
must be closed. The electronic key must
be outside of the vehicle. Touch the sensor
in the door handle of the driver’s or front
passenger’s door again no more than
15 seconds after locking
– or –
press button p of the electronic key’s
remote control again.
If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s
door must be opened and closed once so
that the Vauxhall alarm system can be
switched on.
84
Keys, doors, bonnet
4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system.
LED illuminates. After approx.
10 seconds the system is activated,
without monitoring of the passenger’s
compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes
until system is switched off.
For Astra TwinTop, passenger’s
compartment monitoring is deactivated
if the roof is open to prevent false alarms.
Light emitting diode (LED)
During the first 10 seconds of Vauxhall
alarm system activation:
Picture no: 17050t.tif
Activation without monitoring of
passenger’s compartment and vehicle tilt
e.g. if animals are to be left in the vehicle.
1. Close tailgate and bonnet.
2. Press button b in the roof console.
The LED in button m flashes
(max. 10 seconds) – see next column.
3. Close doors.
z LED illuminated
z LED flashes
rapidly
=
=
Test,
switch-on delay
Door, luggage
compartment,
bonnet open,
system fault
Picture no: 17051t.tif
After the first 10 seconds of Vauxhall alarm
system activation:
z LED flashes
slow
z LED illuminates
for approx. 1 second
=
System
switched on
=
Switch-off
If a system fault occurs, consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Keys, doors, bonnet
85
Note
Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the
use of seat covers, could impair the
function of the passenger’s compartment
monitoring.
Alarm
While the Vauxhall alarm system is
switched on the alarm can be triggered:
z an acoustic signal (horn) and
z a visual signal (hazard warning lights).
The number and duration of the alarms are
legally established.
Picture no: 16968t.tif
To deactivate
Remote control with mechanical key
Press button q on the remote control
– or –
switch on the ignition.
Picture no: 17032t.tif
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Pulling a handle or operating the button
beneath the tailgate handle unlocks the
vehicle and disarms the Vauxhall alarm
system if the electronic key has been
recognised outside of the vehicle
– or –
if button q on the electronic key’s remote
control has been pressed.
In the event of a fault in the radio
frequency remote control or the
Open&Start system, open the vehicle as
described on page 80.
If the alarm is triggered when the driver’s
door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall
alarm system by switching on the ignition.
The alarm is silenced by pressing a button
of the remote control or by switching on the
ignition. The Vauxhall alarm system is
deactivated at the same time.
Alarm siren
with integrated battery 3
The alarm siren monitors the on-board
voltage network and triggers an alarm if
this network is manipulated (e.g. if the
vehicle’s battery is disconnected by
unauthorised persons). The alarm siren has
its own power supply and is therefore not
dependent on the vehicle’s battery.
If the vehicle’s battery is to be
disconnected (e.g. for maintenance work),
the alarm siren must be deactivated as
follows: switch the ignition on then off,
disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15
seconds.
To switch off alarm siren:
Switch ignition on then off.
86
Keys, doors, bonnet
Picture no: 17052t.tif
Child safety locks
9 Warning
Use the child safety lock whenever
children are occupying the rear seats.
Disregard may lead to injuries or
endanger life. Vehicle passengers must
be informed accordingly.
Using key or screwdriver, turn knob on rear
door lock from the vertical position: door
cannot be opened from inside.
Bonnet
Picture no: 17053t.tif
To open the bonnet, pull the release lever
located on the driver’s side below the
instrument panel. The bonnet will then be
unlocked and will partially open. Return
release lever to its original position.
There is a safety catch on the underside of
the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the
bonnet.
When the bonnet is opened, snow or dirt on
the bonnet can slide down and obstruct the
air intake. Air intake – see page 173.
Picture no: 17054t.tif
The bonnet is held open automatically 3.
On other model variants, hold the bonnet
open by engaging the support that runs
across the radiator in the small slot on the
underside of the bonnet.
Press the support firmly into place in its
retainer before closing the bonnet.
Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop into
its catch.
Check that the bonnet is locked in position
by pulling at its front edge. If it is not
engaged, repeat the procedure.
Seats, Interior
Seats, Interior
Head restraints ....................................
Armrest 3 by driver’s seat ..................
Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 ......
Armrest 3 in the rear backrest ...........
Luggage compartment enlargement,
Hatchback .........................................
Luggage compartment enlargement,
Estate without adjustable rear row
of seats ..............................................
Luggage compartment enlargement,
Estate with adjustable rear row of
seats ...................................................
Extending the luggage compartment,
Astra TwinTop ...................................
Folding down the front passenger’s
seat 3.................................................
Luggage compartment cover ............
Safety net 3, Estate.............................
Rails and hooks in the luggage
compartment 3, Estate ....................
FlexOrganizer 3, Estate ......................
Lashing eyes 3 ....................................
Cargo box 3.........................................
Luggage compartment blind,
Astra TwinTop ...................................
Easy Load.............................................
Notes on loading the vehicle..............
Cigarette lighter 3...............................
Accessory socket 3..............................
Ashtray 3 .............................................
Foldaway tables 3 ..............................
Stowage compartments......................
Sunvisors...............................................
87
Push front passenger’s seat as far back as
possible.
88
89
90
90
The seat backrests must not be tilted
too far back (recommended maximum
tilting angle approx. 25°).
9 Warning
91
Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25 cm)
from the steering wheel, to permit safe
airbag deployment.
92
94
96
97
97
99
100
101
102
102
102
103
104
105
106
106
107
108
108
Picture no: 17350t.tif
Front seat adjustment
see pages 3, 4.
Seating position
Adjust driver’s seat such that with the
driver sitting upright the steering wheel is
held in the area of its upper spokes with the
driver’s arms slightly bent.
Failure to observe the descriptions could
lead to injuries which could be fatal.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly before starting-off.
88
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17055t.tif
Head restraints
The middle of the head restraint should
be at eye level. If this is not possible for
extremely tall persons, set to highest
position, and set to lowest position for
small persons.
9 Warning
Failure to observe the descriptions can
lead to injuries which could be fatal.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly before moving away.
6 Removal - see page 89.
Picture no: 16976t.tif
To adjust front seat head restraints
(all model variants) and outboard rear
head restraints,
Hatchback and Estate
To adjust, press button on side and adjust
height.
To fold down the backrests (see page 91)
or improve visibility when the rear seats are
not occupied, remove the head restraints
or push them all the way down.
If seats are occupied, pull head restraints
upwards.
Picture no: 18019t.tif
To adjust the centre rear head restraint 3,
Hatchback and Estate
To adjust, pull the head restraint up or
press the catch to release. Then push the
head restraint down.
To fold down the backrest (see page 91) or
improve visibility when the centre rear seat
is not occupied, remove the head restraint
or push it all the way down.
If seat is occupied, pull head restraint
upwards.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17983t.tif
To adjust the rear head restraints 3,
Astra TwinTop
To adjust, pull the head restraint up or
press the two catches to release. Then push
the head restraint down.
To improve visibility when the rear seats
are not occupied, push the head restraints
all the way down.
If seats are occupied, pull head restraints
upwards.
Do not place any objects on the cover
behind the head restraints or between the
head restraints and the anti-roll bars 3.
Picture no: 17056t.tif
Picture no: 17058t.tif
Removing the head restraints
Press and release the two catches. Pull and
remove the head restraint.
Armrest 3 by driver’s seat
To fold down the backrests 3
(see page 91), push the rear head
restraints all the way down or remove.
The armrest can be moved to different
positions in stages by lifting it.
Push raised armrest backward against
resistance and fold down.
89
90
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17059t.tif
Picture no: 17060t.tif
Adjusting the rear row of seats 3
Armrest 3 in the rear backrest
Pull the handle below the seat the slide the
seat bench to the desired position.
Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap
obliquely down (45°).
Release the handle and engage the seat
bench.
When the centre rear seat is in use or the
rear backrests are folded, fold the armrest
up.
A flap located behind the armrest
facilitates transport of long, narrow
objects – see page 95.
Picture no: 17982t.tif
Astra TwinTop
Pull the armrest by the strap, pivot it down
and position on the seat with the flat
side up.
The armrest is held in place on the backrest
with a retaining strap. To fully remove the
armrest, disengage the bracket at the
retaining strap.
A flap located behind the armrest
facilitates transport of long, narrow
objects – see page 96.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17061t.tif
Luggage compartment
enlargement,
Hatchback
Folding the backrest
Pushing rear head restraints all the way
down or remove – see page 88.
Slide front seat forward slightly.
Disengage the backrest (single or split 3)
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto
the seat cushion.
Return front seat to desired position.
Picture no: 17062t.tif
91
Picture no: 17063t.tif
Fold down centre backrest 3
Push head restraint all the way down –
see page 88.
Restoring backrest to an upright position
Guide the seat belt through the side
bracket to protect against damage.
Disengage backrest using handle and fold
onto seat cushion.
Restore the backrest to an upright position
and audibly engage.
Folding down the centre seat backrest
makes it possible to load longer objects.
The outer seats can still be used for
occupants.
The three-point seat belt for the centre rear
seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel
if the backrest is properly engaged.
9 Warning
The load must not hinder handbrake
operation or gearshifting.
Notes on loading
see page 104.
92
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17064t.tif
Luggage compartment
enlargement,
Estate without adjustable rear
row of seats
Fold the backrest onto the seat cushion
Push the rear head restraints all the way
down or remove – see page 88. Detach the
hooks of the luggage compartment cover
from the head restraints – see page 98.
Slide front seat forward slightly.
Disengage the backrest (single or split)
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto
the seat cushion.
Return front seat to desired position.
Picture no: 17065t.tif
Raise the seat cushion and fold the
backrest
Pull the strap on the seat cushion and lift
the backrest forwards (single or split).
Detach the hooks of the luggage
compartment cover from the head
restraints – see page 98.
Picture no: 17066t.tif
Remove the outer rear head restraints.
Push the centre head restraint all the way
down – see page 88.
Stow the removed head restraints in the
cavity below the raised seat cushions.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17067t.tif
Disengage the backrest (single or split)
using the pushbutton, fold it forward and
engage.
Picture no: 17062t.tif
Fold down centre backrest 3
Push head restraint all the way down –
see page 88.
Disengage backrest using handle and fold
onto seat cushion. If the seat cushion is
raised, fold it forward until it engages.
Folding the centre seat backrest makes it
possible to load longer objects. The outer
seats can still be used for occupants.
9 Warning
The load must not hinder handbrake
operation or gearshifting.
93
Picture no: 17068t.tif
Restoring the backrests or seat
cushions 3 to their original position
Guide the seat belt through the side
bracket to protect against damage.
To restore the backrest to an upright
position, fold up, pressing the button on
the backrest. Audibly engage the backrest
in an upright position.
94
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17069t.tif
Raised seat cushions: insert and adjust
head restraints in backrests –
see pages 5, 88. Fold back seat cushions,
making sure the belt buckles are properly
positioned.
Attach the hooks of the luggage
compartment cover to the head restraints –
see page 98.
The three-point seat belt for the centre rear
seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel
if the backrest is properly engaged.
Picture no: 17070t.tif
Luggage compartment
enlargement,
Estate with adjustable rear row of
seats
Fold backrests onto seat cushions
Push the rear head restraints all the way
down or remove – see page 88. Detach the
hooks of the luggage compartment cover
from the head restraints – see page 98.
Slide front seat forward slightly.
Safety net 3,
see page 99.
Disengage the backrest (single or split)
using the sliders and fold it down onto the
seat cushion.
Notes on loading,
see page 104.
Return front seat to desired position.
Picture no: 17071t.tif
Raise the seat cushion and fold the
backrest
Lift rear seat cushions forward, single or
split.
Detach the hooks of the luggage
compartment cover from the head
restraints – see page 98.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17072t.tif
Remove the outer rear head restraints.
Push the centre head restraint all the
way down – see page 88.
Stow the removed head restraints in the
cavity below the raised seat cushions.
Picture no: 17073t.tif
Disengage the backrest (single or split)
using the sliders, fold it forward and
engage.
95
Picture no: 17074t.tif
Loading option behind the armrest in the
rear seat backrest 3
Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap
obliquely down (i.e. at an angle of 45°).
Pull the handle and fold down the cover.
Folding down the cover makes it possible
to load long, narrow objects. The outer
seats can still be used for occupants.
9 Warning
The load must not hinder handbrake
operation or gearshifting.
To restore, fold the armrest back in
position.
96
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17068t.tif
Restoring the backrests or seat
cushions 3 to their original position
Guide the seat belts through the side
brackets to protect against damage.
To restore the backrest to an upright
position, fold up, disengaging the backrest
at the sliders. Audibly engage the backrest
in an upright position.
Picture no: 17075t.tif
Raised seat cushions: insert and adjust
head restraints in backrests –
see pages 5, 88. Fold back seat cushions,
making sure the belt buckles are properly
positioned.
Attach the hooks of the luggage
compartment cover to the head restraints –
see page 98.
The three-point seat belt for the centre rear
seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel
if the backrest is properly engaged.
Safety net 3,
see page 99.
Notes on loading,
see page 104.
Picture no: 18020t.tif
Extending the luggage
compartment,
Astra TwinTop
Loading area between rear seats
Pull out the armrest by the strap.
The armrest is held in place on the backrest
with a retaining strap. To fully remove the
armrest, disengage the bracket at the
retaining strap.
Pull the handle and fold down the cover.
9 Warning
The load must not hinder handbrake
operation or gearshifting.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17984t.tif
Picture no: 17076t.tif
Cover behind armrest can be locked from
luggage compartment 3: turn handle 90°:
Folding down the front
passenger’s seat 3
Locked
=
Unlocked =
Push front passenger’s seat head restraint
all the way down or remove –
see pages 5, 88.
Handle horizontal
Handle vertical
Notes on loading,
see page 104.
Push front passenger’s seat back.
Fold front passenger’s seat forward
by raising release lever.
To restore, press the release lever forward,
restore the front seat backrest to an
upright position and audibly engage.
Picture no: 17077t.tif
Luggage compartment cover
Hatchback
To remove, unhook the retaining straps
from the tailgate.
Pull cover from the side guides.
Fit in reverse order.
97
98
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17078t.tif
Estate
To open
Press handle on luggage compartment
cover down. The cover automatically
unrolls.
To close
Press handle on luggage compartment
cover rearwards; the cover automatically
engages in its end position.
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged
objects on the cover.
Picture no: 17079t.tif
To cover the gap between the luggage
compartment cover and the rear
backrests, there is a cover on the cartridge.
Attach the two hooks of the cover to the
head restraint guide rods. If the safety net
is mounted, run the hooks through the net
mesh.
Picture no: 17080t.tif
Removing
Open the luggage compartment cover and
detach the hooks from the head restraints.
Move release lever on right side of luggage
compartment cover upward. Lift right
cover and remove from brackets.
Fitting
Insert the luggage compartment cover in
the recess on the left, press the release
lever on the right side upward, insert the
cover in the recess on the right, engage
and press the lever down.
Attach the hooks on the head restraints –
see Fig. 17079 T.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17081t.tif
Safety net 3,
Estate
The safety net can be mounted behind the
rear seats or, if the rear seat backrests are
folded and the seat cushions raised,
behind the front seats.
Fitting behind the rear seats
Remove the luggage compartment cover –
see left column.
Unroll the safety net.
There are two brackets in the roof frame.
Hook the net rods into the brackets on one
side and then the other. Slide forward to
engage.
Picture no: 17082t.tif
Fixed rear row of seats: extend the safety
net straps by adjusting the strap at the
upper fastener in the loop of the strap
(see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the
eyelets in the floor on the right and left.
Adjustable rear row of seats 3: extend the
safety net straps by adjusting the strap at
the upper fastener in the loop of the strap
(see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the
eyelets on the back of the right and left
rear seat backrest.
Install the luggage compartment cover –
see left column.
99
Picture no: 17083t.tif
Fitting behind front seats
Raise the rear seat cushions –
see pages 92 and 94.
Unroll the safety net.
There are two brackets in the roof frame
above the front seats. Hook the net rods
into the brackets on one side and then the
other. Slide forward to engage.
Fixed rear row of seats: extend the safety
net straps by adjusting the strap at the
upper fastener in the loop of the strap
(see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the
eyelets in the floor on the right and left.
100
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17084t.tif
Adjustable rear row of seats 3: extend the
safety net straps by adjusting the strap at
the upper fastener in the loop of the strap
(see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the
brackets on the right and left raised seat
cushions.
Remove the outer rear head restraints and
fold the backrests forward –
see pages 92 and 94.
Picture no: 17085t.tif
Removing
Detach the safety net belt straps by tipping
up the length adjuster.
Unhook the safety net rods from the
brackets in the roof frame. Roll up the net
and secure with a strap.
Picture no: 17086t.tif
Rails and hooks in the luggage
compartment 3,
Estate
The side walls of the luggage compartment
house two rails. Insert the hooks in the
desired position in the rails: insert the hook
in the upper groove on the rail and press in
the lower groove.
Pull off the hook to remove.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17087t.tif
FlexOrganizer 3,
Estate
Flexible system for dividing the luggage
compartment or securing loads in an
Estate.
The system consists of
z adapters
z variable partition net
z mesh pockets for the side walls
z hooks in the luggage compartment
Components are mounted in the two guide
rails in the side walls of the luggage
compartment by means of adapters or
hooks.
Picture no: 17088t.tif
Variable partition net
Insert an adapter in each rail: fold up
handle plate, insert adapter in upper and
lower groove of rails, move to desired
position. To lock the adapter, swivel the
handle plate up. Compress the rods of the
partition net slightly and insert in
corresponding openings of the adapter.
The longer rod must be inserted in the
upper adapter.
101
Picture no: 17089t.tif
Hooks and mesh pocket
Insert the hooks in the desired position in
the rails: insert the hook in the upper
groove on the rail and press in the lower
groove. The mesh pocket can be hung from
the hooks.
Removing
Press the partition net rods together and
remove from the adapters.
Adapter: fold open the retainer, release the
adapter from the lower groove and remove
from the upper groove.
Release the hooks from the rails.
102
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17090t.tif
Picture no: 17092t.tif
Lashing eyes 3
Cargo box 3
These enable loads to be secured in
position in the luggage compartment using
lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3.
Foldable box under the floor cover used to
divide the luggage compartment.
The cargo box may only be loaded when
the backrests are engaged in an upright
position.
To remove the cargo box floor cover,
remove first the right half then the left half.
For models with towing equipment, first
release the coupling ball bar fixing strap
and thread this through the eye –
see page 238. Installation in the reverse
order.
Picture no: 18024t.tif
Luggage compartment blind,
Astra TwinTop
To open
Disengage the luggage compartment
blind from the recess on the right and left.
Rolls up automatically.
To close
Grasp the handle, pull the blind towards
the rear of the vehicle and engage in the
recess on the right and left.
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged
objects on the blind.
There must be no objects outside of or on
top of the luggage compartment blind
when the roof is open or in the process of
opening.
The roof can only be operated when the
luggage compartment blind is closed.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17978t.tif
Easy Load
(Electrically operated loading aid
for the luggage compartment of
the Astra TwinTop)
The loading aid makes it possible to
comfortably load the luggage
compartment when the roof is open. The
press of a button will raise the roof folded
up in the luggage compartment 25 cm.
This enlarges the load opening of the
luggage compartment.
z Open the boot lid.
z Unhook the luggage compartment blind
and attach it to the rear window frame.
z Briefly press button ,: the folded roof is
raised. The roof remains in this end
position for approx. 9 minutes.
Picture no: 17977t.tif
z Do not load the luggage compartment
higher than the load height marking
(see Fig. 17973 T). Otherwise, both the
roof and the load will be damaged.
z Detach the luggage compartment blind
from the rear window frame and engage
it in the recess on the left and right. The
blind must be perfectly flat when closed.
z Briefly press button ,: the folded roof is
lowered.
z Close the boot lid.
103
Picture no: 17973t.tif
9 Warning
Take care when operating the loading
aid. Risk of injury.
Make sure that nothing could be pinched.
Make sure no one is in the action zone
during operation. Risk of injury.
This is especially important for children.
Inform passengers accordingly.
6
104
Seats, Interior
Note
z Do not place objects on or near the
luggage compartment blind.
z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when
transporting objects in the luggage
compartment – see page 99.
z The folded roof can only be lowered
when the blind is closed. Otherwise, a
warning buzzer will sound three times.
z Estate: close the luggage compartment
cover so the rear window does not reflect
the objects.
z Movement can only be stopped by
pressing button ,. Holding the button
depressed will change the direction of
movement.
z If the backrests are not folded down
when transporting objects in the
luggage compartment, they must be
engaged in their upright position 3 –
see pages 91, 93, 96.
z An acoustic signal sounds to confirm
that the roof has reached its upper or
lower end position.
z Only close the boot lid once the
confirmation signal has sounded to
indicate that the loading aid is in its
lower end position.
z Do not touch moving parts.
z One minute before the end of the hold
time for the raised loading aid, a
warning buzzer will sound to remind you
to lower the roof.
z The loading aid is only operable when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Picture no: 17093t.tif
Notes on loading the vehicle
z Heavy objects in the luggage
compartment should be placed against
the engaged rear seat backrests 3 or, if
the rear seat backrests are folded down,
against the front seat backrests. If
objects are to be stacked, the heavier
objects should be placed at the bottom.
Unsecured objects in the luggage
compartment would be thrown forward
with great force in the event of heavy
braking, for example.
z Secure heavy objects with lashing
straps 3 attached to lashing eyes –
see page 102. If heavy loads slip when
the vehicle is braked heavily or driven
around a bend, the handling of the
vehicle may change.
z Do not allow the load to protrude above
the upper edge of the rear seat
backrests, or above the upper edge of
the front seat backrests if the rear seat
backrests 3 are folded down.
z Astra TwinTop: note the maximum
loading height when the roof is open.
See page 103, Fig. 17973 T.
z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit
(cushion) 3 must always be freely
accessible.
z Do not place any objects in front of the
rear window or on the instrument panel.
They are reflected in the glass, obstruct
the driver’s view and will be thrown
through the vehicle, for instance in the
event of heavy braking.
z The load must not hinder handbrake
operation or gearshifting or impair the
driver in any way.
Seats, Interior
105
z Astra TwinTop: do not place any objects
on the cover of the deployable anti-roll
bars 3, behind the rear head restraints
or in the luggage compartment outside
of, on or next to the luggage
compartment cover.
z Do not place any objects in the
deployment area of the airbags and
deployable anti-roll bars 3 as this poses
a risk of injury should the systems be
triggered.
z Do not drive with luggage compartment
open when transporting bulky objects,
for example, since toxic exhaust fumes
could penetrate the interior.
z Weights, payload and roof load –
see page 318.
z Driving with a roof load
(see pages 196, 199, 234) increases the
sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds
and has a detrimental effect on vehicle
handling owing to the vehicle’s higher
centre of gravity.
9 Warning
Failure to observe these descriptions can
lead to injuries which may be fatal.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Picture no: 17094t.tif
Cigarette lighter 3
The cigarette lighter is located under the
ashtray cover.
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated.
Picture no: 17095t.tif
Press in cigarette lighter. Switches off
automatically once the element is glowing.
Pull out lighter.
106
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 18023t.tif
Accessory socket 3
Some vehicles have an accessory socket for
the connection of electrical accessories
instead of a cigarette lighter. Use of the
accessory socket while the engine is not
running will discharge the battery.
Picture no: 17096t.tif
Estates have an additional accessory
socket 3 in the luggage compartment.
Do not damage the sockets by using
unsuitable plugs.
The maximum power consumption of
electrical accessories must not exceed
120 watts.
Do not connect any current-delivering
accessories, e.g. electrical charging
devices or batteries.
Electrical accessories connected to the
socket must comply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid
down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise vehicle
malfunctions may occur.
Picture no: 17094t.tif
Ashtray 3
To be used only for ash and not for
combustible rubbish.
9 Warning
Failure to observe these descriptions can
lead to injuries which may be fatal.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Ashtray front
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated.
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17097t.tif
To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray
insert at the spots illustrated and pull
upwards.
Picture no: 17098t.tif
Rear ashtray 3
In the rear centre console.
Pull out the ashtray by pushing on one of
the sides.
107
Picture no: 17099t.tif
To empty, open the ashtray, press the
spring (arrow) and pull the ashtray straight
out rearwards.
Foldaway tables 3
On the front seat backrests.
Open by pulling upward until it engages.
Fold away by pressing down past the
resistance point.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
table.
108
Seats, Interior
Picture no: 17101t.tif
Stowage compartments
Glove compartment
To open, pull handle upwards.
The glove compartment shelf 3 can be
removed: disengage the shelf by pulling on
the front edge.
Refit the shelf by sliding it into the side
guide strips and engage it in the rear panel
by pushing.
The front of the open cover houses a pen
holder and a coin compartment.
Cooled glove compartment 3 –
see page 155.
Picture no: 17103t.tif
Stowage compartment in front armrest 3
To open, press button and open upper part
of armrest.
Picture no: 17102t.tif
Stowage compartment for glasses 3
On driver’s side: fold down to open.
Do not store heavy objects in the stowage
compartment.
Sunvisors
Use the sunvisor to protect from glare
by pulling it down and swivelling it to the
side 3.
On vehicles with panoramic windscreen 3,
close the sunvisors before moving the roof
lining.
Safety systems
Safety systems
Three-stage safety system
Comprising:
z three-point seat belts,
z belt tensioners at the front seats,
Seat belts..............................................
Three-point seat belts .........................
Testing the belts ..................................
Belt tensioners......................................
Using the belts .....................................
Vauxhall Full-size airbag system .......
Mounting brackets 3 for
ISO-FIX child restraint systems ........
Child restraint system 3 ......................
Rollover protection system 3..............
Exterior mirrors.....................................
Aspherical exterior mirror 3 ...............
Automatic anti-dazzle interior
mirror 3..............................................
Sunvisors, glove compartment ...........
Hazard warning lights.........................
Head restraints ....................................
Safety accessories 3 ...........................
110
110
111
111
113
115
127
128
130
132
132
132
132
132
133
133
z airbag systems for the driver,
front passenger and outboard rear
seats 3; for TwinTop 3, anti-roll bars
behind the backrests.
The three stages are activated in sequence
depending on the severity of the accident:
z The automatic seat belt locking devices
prevent the belt strap from being pulled
out and thus ensure that the vehicle
occupants are retained in their seats.
z The front seat belt buckles are pulled
downwards. As a result, the seat belts
are instantaneously tightened and the
occupants are made aware of the
deceleration of the vehicle at a very early
stage. This reduces the stress placed on
the body.
z In the event of a severe accident, the
airbag systems and deployable anti-roll
bars 3 also deploy, forming safety
cushions for the occupants. The front
airbags are inflated in two stages based
on the severity of the collision.
109
9 Warning
The airbag systems and anti-roll bars 3
serve to supplement the three-point seat
belts and belt tensioners. The seat belts
must therefore always be worn.
Disregard of these instructions could lead
to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle
passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Read the instructions supplied with the
child restraint system!
110
Safety systems
Seat belts
9 Warning
Always wear your seat belt, and that
means also in urban traffic and when you
are a rear seat passenger. It can save
your life!
Seat belts are only intended for one person.
They are not suitable for anyone under
12 years of age or under 150 cm tall.
For children up to 12 years of age, we
recommend the Vauxhall child restraint
system – see page 128.
Pregnant women must always wear a
seat belt – see page 113.
In the event of an accident, persons not
wearing seat belts endanger their fellow
occupants and themselves.
Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt –
see page 38.
Picture no: 16981t.tif
Three-point seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with three-point
seat belts with automatic retractors and
locking devices, allowing freedom of body
movement although the spring tensioned
belts always ensure a snug fit.
For information on correct seating
position – see pages 87, 113, 117.
The belt has a "vehicle sensitive retractor"
which is designed to lock during heavy
acceleration or deceleration in any
direction.
Safety systems
Testing the belts
Actuation of belt tensioners
Indicated by illumination of control
indicator v - see next page.
Please check all parts of the belt system
occasionally for damage and correct
operation. Have damaged parts replaced.
In case of an accident, please replace
overstretched belts and triggered belt
tensioners. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The belt tensioners must be replaced after
activation. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
If the seat belts are undamaged the
operation thereof is unaffected, even if the
belt tensioners have been triggered.
Do not perform any alterations on the
belts, their anchorages, the automatic
retractors or the belt buckles.
Make sure that belts are not damaged or
trapped by sharp-edged objects.
111
Important information – see page 112.
Picture no: 17104t.tif
Belt tensioners
The front seat belt systems are equipped
with belt tensioners. In the event of a headon or rear-end collision of a certain
severity, the belt buckles are pulled down,
thus tightening the belts.
112
Safety systems
9 Warning
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The system’s integrated self-diagnostics
allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have
your Car Pass to hand when consulting a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Important
Picture no: 17105t.tif
Control indicator v for belt tensioners
The belt tensioners are electronic
monitored together with the airbag
systems and the deployable anti-roll
bars 3. Their operational readiness is
indicated by control indicator v on the
instrument panel. When the ignition is
switched on, the control indicator v
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it
does not illuminate, does not go off after
4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving,
there is a fault in the belt tensioner system,
airbag systems or the deployable anti-roll
bars 3 - see page 121. The belt tensioners,
airbag systems or deployable anti-roll
bars 3 may fail to trigger in the event of
an accident.
Deployment of the belt tensioners is
indicated by continuous illumination of v.
z Accessories and other objects not
specifically approved for your vehicle
type must not be affixed or placed within
the action zone of the belt tensioners
(near the belt buckles) as this could
result in injury if the belt tensioners are
triggered.
z Do not make any modifications to the
components of the belt tensioners, as
this will render the vehicle unroadworthy.
9 Warning
Improper handling (e.g. removal or
installation) can activate the belt
tensioners – risk of injury.
z The belt tensioner and airbag system
control electronics can be found in the
centre console area. In order to avoid
malfunctions, do not store magnetic
objects in this area.
z We recommend that you have the front
seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer in the event of actuation of the
belt tensioners.
z The belt tensioners only actuate once.
Please replace belt tensioners that have
been triggered. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z Applicable safety directives must always
be observed when disposing of the
vehicle. For this reason, disposal should
be performed by an authorised recycling
company. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17106t.tif
Using the belts
Fitting seat belts
Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide
it across the body, making certain that it is
not twisted.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The
front seat backrest must not be tilted back
too far or the seat belt will not operate
properly. The recommended angle of
inclination is 25°. Make sure that the lap
belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly
across the body. Tension the belt
frequently while driving by tugging the
diagonal part of the belt.
Picture no: 17107t.tif
9 Warning
On pregnant women in particular, the
lap belt must be positioned as low as
possible across the pelvis so as not to
put too much pressure on the abdomen.
Bulky clothing prevents the belt from fitting
properly. The belt must not rest against
hard or fragile objects in the pockets of
your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys,
spectacles) because these could cause
injury. Do not place any objects (e.g.
handbags, mobile phones) between the
belt and your body.
113
Picture no: 17108t.tif
Height adjustment 3
of front seat belt upper anchorage point:
1. Pull belt out slightly.
2. Press down button on adjuster slide.
3. Move adjuster slide up or down.
4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch.
Do not adjust height while driving.
6
114
Safety systems
Three-point seat belts on rear outer seats
When not in use, pass seat belts through
side holders 3 as shown in Fig. 17063 T on
page 91.
Three-point seat belt of centre rear seat 3
The belt can only be pulled from the inertia
reel when the backrests are upright and
properly engaged – see page 91.
Picture no: 16981t.tif
Adjust height such that the belt passes
over the wearer’s shoulder and rests
against the shoulder. It must not pass
over the neck or upper arm.
Picture no: 17109t.tif
Removing the belt
To remove the belt, depress the red
pushbutton on the buckle; the belt will
retract automatically.
Three-point seat belts of rear seats in
Astra TwinTop
In order to prevent the flutter noise caused
by the belts when the roof and windows are
open, the seat belts can be secured behind
the cushion hatch when the rear seats are
not occupied.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17009t.tif
Vauxhall Full-size airbag system
The Vauxhall Full-size airbag system
comprises several individual systems.
Front airbag system
The front airbag system will be triggered in
the event of a serious accident involving a
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
Picture no: 17110t.tif
Side airbag system
The side airbag is triggered in the event of
a side-on collision to form a safety cushion
for the driver or front passenger in the
respective door area. This substantially
reduces the risk of injury to the upper body
and pelvis.
Picture no: 17351t.tif
115
Curtain airbag system 3
The curtain airbag system triggers in case
of a side-on collision and provides a safety
barrier in the head area on the respective
side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
injury to the head considerably in case of a
side-on collision.
116
Safety systems
Exception:
Front passenger’s seat with seat
occupancy recognition system 3. The seat
occupancy recognition system deactivates
the front and side airbags on the
passenger’s side if the front passenger’s
seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3 has
been fitted to the front passenger’s seat.
Seat occupancy recognition – see
page 122. Vauxhall child restraint system
with transponders 3 –
see page 128.
Vauxhall Full-size airbag system
z seat occupancy recognition 3,
Examples of events triggering the front
airbag system:
Front airbag
The front airbag system is identified by the
word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and
above the glove compartment.
z the control indicator for Vauxhall child
restraint systems y with transponders 3
in the instrument panel.
z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle:
the front airbags are triggered at low
vehicle speed.
The front airbag system will be triggered:
z Impact against a yielding obstacle (such
as another vehicle): the front airbags are
only triggered at a higher vehicle speed.
Picture no: 17111t.tif
The front airbag system comprises:
z an airbag with inflator in the steering
wheel and a second one in the
instrument panel,
z control electronics with impact sensors,
z the airbag systems control indicator v in
the instrument panel,
Picture no: 17112t.tif
z depending on the severity of the
accident,
z depending on the type of impact,
z within the range shown in the illustration,
z independent of side airbag and curtain
airbag system 3.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17009t.tif
When triggered, the front airbags inflate
in milliseconds to form a safety cushion
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the front seat
occupants is checked, thereby
substantially reducing the risk of injury
to the upper body and head.
No impairment of view will occur, because
the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly.
Picture no: 17350t.tif
9 Warning
The front airbag system provides
optimum protection when the seat,
backrest and head restraint are correctly
adjusted: adjust the driver’s seat
according to the occupant’s height such
that with the driver sitting upright the
steering wheel is held in the area of its
upper spokes with the driver’s arms
slightly bent. The passenger’s seat should
be as far back as possible, with the
backrest upright – see pages 3, 87. Do
not place the head, body, hands or feet
on the covers of the airbag systems.
Do not place any objects in the area in
which the airbags inflate. Important
information – see page 124.
117
Picture no: 16981t.tif
9 Warning
The three-point seat belt must be
correctly fitted – see page 113.
The front airbag system will not be
triggered in the event of
z the ignition being switched off,
z minor frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a side or rear-impact
that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to
the occupants.
118
Safety systems
9 Warning
Seat belts must therefore always be worn.
The front airbag system serves to
supplement the three-point seat belts.
If you do not wear your seat belt you risk
being seriously injured, or even thrown
from the vehicle, in the event of an
accident.
In the event of an accident the belt helps
to keep you in the correct seating
position, so that the front airbag system
can provide you with effective protection.
In addition, the front airbag system will not
be triggered for the front passenger in
model variants with seat occupancy
recognition 3 if
z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied,
z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3.
Seat occupancy recognition –
see page 122. Vauxhall child restraint
system with transponders 3 –
see page 128.
Picture no: 17113t.tif
Side airbags
The side airbag system is identified by the
word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the
front seat backrests.
The side airbag system comprises:
z an airbag with inflator in the back of the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat
respectively,
z the control electronics,
z the side-impact sensors,
z the airbag systems control indicator v in
the instrument panel,
z seat occupancy recognition 3,
z the control indicator for Vauxhall child
restraint systems y with transponders 3
in the instrument panel.
Picture no: 17114t.tif
The side airbag system will be triggered:
z depending on the severity of the
accident,
z depending on the type of impact,
z within the range shown in the illustration
on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or
front passenger’s side,
z independently of the front airbag
system.
Exception:
Front passenger’s seat with seat
occupancy recognition system 3. The seat
occupancy recognition system deactivates
the front and side airbags on the
passenger’s side if the front passenger’s
seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3 has
been fitted to the front passenger’s seat.
Seat occupancy recognition – see
page 122. Vauxhall child restraint system
with transponders 3 – see page 128.
Safety systems
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in
which the airbag inflates or in the area
between the seat backs and the vehicle
body. Do not place the hands or arms on
the covers of the airbag systems.
Important information – see page 124.
The three-point seat belt must always be
correctly fitted – see page 113.
Picture no: 17110t.tif
When triggered, the side airbag inflates
within milliseconds to form a safety cushion
for the driver or front passenger in the
respective door area. This substantially
reduces the risk of injury to the upper body
and pelvis in the event of a side-on
collision.
The side airbags will not be triggered in the
event of
z the ignition being switched off,
z frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a rear-impact,
z collisions involving a side-impact outside
the passenger’s cell.
119
In addition, the side airbag system will
not be triggered for the front passenger
in model variants with seat occupancy
recognition 3 if
z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied,
z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3.
Seat occupancy recognition –
see page 122. Vauxhall child restraint
system with transponders 3 –
see page 128.
120
Safety systems
Picture no: 17115t.tif
Picture no: 17114t.tif
Curtain airbag 3
The curtain airbag system is identified by
the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim.
The curtain airbag system will be triggered:
The curtain airbag system comprises:
z depending on the type of impact,
z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame
on the driver’s and front passenger’s side
respectively,
z the control electronics,
z the side-impact sensors,
z the airbag systems control indicator v in
the instrument panel.
z depending on the severity of the
accident,
z within the range shown in the illustration
on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or
front passenger’s side,
z together with the side airbag system,
z irrespective of seat occupancy
recognition,
z independently of the front airbag
system.
Picture no: 17351t.tif
When the curtain airbag is triggered it
inflates within milliseconds and provides
a safety barrier in the head area on the
respective side of the vehicle. This reduces
the risk of injury to the head considerably in
case of a side-impact.
Safety systems
121
9 Warning
9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in
which the airbag inflates. Do not place
the hands or arms on the covers of the
airbag systems. Important information –
see page 124.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The system’s integrated self-diagnostics
allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have
your Car Pass to hand when consulting a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The three-point seat belt must always be
correctly fitted – see page 113.
The curtain airbags will not be triggered in
the event of
z the ignition being switched off,
z frontal collisions,
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns,
z collisions involving a rear-impact,
z collisions involving a side-impact outside
the passenger’s cell.
Picture no: 17105t.tif
Control indicator v for airbag systems
The airbag systems are electronic
monitored together with seat occupancy
recognition 3, the belt tensioners and
the deployable anti-roll bars 3. Their
operational readiness is indicated by
control indicator v on the instrument
panel. When the ignition is switched on,
the control indicator v illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,
does not go off after 4 seconds or
illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault
in the airbag systems, seat occupancy
recognition 3, the belt tensioners or the
deployable anti-roll bars 3 - see page 112.
The systems may fail to trigger in the event
of an accident.
Deployment of the airbags is indicated by
continuous illumination of v.
122
Safety systems
Seat occupancy recognition 3
The seat occupancy recognition system
deactivates the front and side airbags for
the front passenger if the front passenger’s
seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3 is
fitted on the front passenger’s seat. The
curtain airbag system 3 remains activated.
The control indicator for seat occupancy
recognition y is located in the instrument
panel. If control indicator y illuminates
for approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the vehicle is equipped with
seat occupancy recognition –
see next page, Fig. 17117 T.
If a Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 is installed, control
indicator y illuminates once the ignition
has been switched on and the system has
detected the seat. Only then can a child
restraint system with transponders 3 be
used on the front passenger’s seat.
9 Warning
Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passenger’s seat. Use of systems without
transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be identified
by a sticker.
Picture no: 17116t.tif
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
are also identified by a sticker on the lower
panel of the front passenger’s seats – see
illustration above.
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 are automatically
detected if correctly fitted to the front
passenger’s seat. When this type of child
restraint system is in use on the front
passenger’s seat, the front and side airbag
systems for the front passenger’s seat are
deactivated. The curtain airbag system
remains activated. Pay attention to control
indicator y for seat occupancy
recognition 3 - see Fig. 17117 T.
Note
On the Astra TwinTop, there may be
interference in radio reception of certain
frequencies in the medium waveband
when the roof is open and the front
passenger’s seat is unoccupied.
Safety systems
Control indicator y for Vauxhall child
restraint systems with transponders 3
The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint
system with transponders 3 is indicated by
the illumination of control indicator y in
the instrument panel once the ignition has
been switched on and the seat occupancy
recognition system has detected the child
restraint system.
123
If the control indicator y flashes even
though there is correctly installed child
restraint system with transponders 3, there
is a fault-risk of fatal injury to the child. Fit
child restraint system to rear seat. Have
the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17117t.tif
If the control indicator y does not
illuminate whilst driving, the front and side
airbag have not been deactivated on the
passenger’s side. Risk of fatal injury to the
child - fit child restraint system to rear seat.
Have cause of fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or the transponder is faulty, the
control indicator y flashes. Check for
correct installation of child restraint
system. To install the child restraint system
with transponders 3, see the instructions
enclosed with the system.
If no Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 is installed, the control
indicator y must neither illuminate nor
flash, since this indicates that the front
passenger’s airbag systems would not
be triggered. Have the cause of fault
remedied. We recommend that you consult
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
9 Warning
If the Vauxhall child restraint system
with transponders 3 has been fitted
according to the instructions, the control
indicator y for Vauxhall restraint
systems with transponders must
illuminate in the instrument panel when
the ignition is switched on.
If the control indicator y does not
illuminate whilst driving, the airbag
systems have not been deactivated on
the passenger’s side. Risk of fatal injury.
In this case, fit child restraint system to
rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
124
Safety systems
Important
z Do not affix or place accessories or other
objects in the deployment area or the
airbag systems or deployable anti-roll
bars 3 as this could result in injuries if the
components are triggered.
z Do not place any objects between the
airbag systems / anti-roll bar covers 3
and the occupants. Risk of injury.
z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to
hang up light articles of clothing or coat
hangers. Do not place any objects in the
pockets of the hanging items – risk of
injury.
z The control electronics of the airbag
systems, belt tensioners and deployable
anti-roll bars 3 are located in the centre
console area. Do not store any magnetic
objects in the area as they could cause
malfunction.
z Do not bond or use other materials to
cover the steering wheel, instrument
panel, front seat backrests and roof
frame, in the area of the airbags, the
passenger’s seat cushion or the covers of
the deployable anti-roll bars 3.
z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to
clean the steering wheel, instrument
panel, front seat backrests, roof frame
and seat cushion of the front
passenger’s seat. Do not use any
aggressive cleaning agents.
z Only protective covers which are
approved for your Astra with side airbag
system may be fitted on the front seats.
When fitting the protective covers, make
sure that the airbag units on the
outboard sides of the front seat
backrests are not covered.
z The airbag systems are triggered
independently of each other based on
the severity of the accident and the type
of impact. The side airbag system and
the curtain airbag system 3 are
triggered together.
z Astra TwinTop: the deployable anti-roll
bars 3 are deployed together with the
front and side airbag systems
depending on the severity of the impact.
z Each airbag or deployable anti-roll
bar 3 can only be deployed once.
Have deployed components replaced
immediately. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z The speeds, directions of movement and
deformation properties of the vehicles,
and the properties of the obstacle
concerned, determine the severity of the
accident and triggering of the airbags.
The degree of damage to your vehicle
and the resulting repair costs alone are
not indicative that the criteria for
triggering of the airbags were met.
z Do not make any modifications to
components of the airbag systems or the
anti-roll bars 3 as this would render the
vehicle unroadworthy.
9 Warning
The systems can be triggered abruptly
and cause injury if they are handled
improperly.
z We recommend having the steering
wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling
parts, the door seals, the handles and
the seats removed by your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
z Applicable safety directives must always
be observed when disposing of the
vehicle. For this reason, disposal should
be performed by an authorised recycling
company. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Safety systems
z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should
only travel on the rear seats. This does
not apply to children who are travelling
in child restraint systems with
transponders 3.
z In vehicles with seat occupancy
recognition 3, do not place any heavy
objects on the front passenger’s seat
otherwise the airbag systems for the
front passenger’s seat may be triggered
in the event of an accident.
z In vehicles with seat occupancy
recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions
do not use protective covers or seat
cushions on the front passenger’s seat.
125
z In order to prevent malfunctions when
using a Vauxhall child restraint system
with transponders 3 on the front
passenger’s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic
sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be
placed under the child restraint system.
9 Warning
Child restraint systems as well as other
objects must never be carried on the
lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If
carried in this way, child restraint systems
with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat
occupancy recognition 3 could lead to
front passenger’s airbag systems not
being triggered in the event of an
accident.
Picture no: 17118t.tif
Use of child restraint systems 3 on the
front passenger’s seat in vehicles with
airbag systems, but without seat
occupancy recognition 3
9 Warning
No child restraint system 3 may be
installed on front passenger’s seat.
Danger to life.
Model variants with front passenger’s
airbag can be identified by the word
AIRBAG over the glove compartment and
the warning sticker on the side of the
instrument panel, visible when the
passenger’s door is open – see illustration.
6
126
Safety systems
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
are identified by a sticker on the lower
panel of the front passenger’s seat –
see Fig. 17116 T.
Picture no: 17119t.tif
The side airbag system is identified by the
word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the
front seat backrests.
Seat occupancy recognition 3 –
see page 122.
Picture no: 17116t.tif
Use of child restraint systems 3 on front
passenger’s seat in vehicles with airbag
systems and seat occupancy
recognition 3
9 Warning
Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passenger’s seats. Use of systems
without transponders poses a risk of fatal
injury.
Safety systems
Picture no: 17117t.tif
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition
can also be identified by control
indicator y in the instrument panel. If
control indicator y illuminates for approx.
4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the vehicle is equipped with seat
occupancy recognition – see page 122.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Vauxhall child restraint systems
with transponders 3 and deactivates the
front and side airbag systems for the front
passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag
system remains activated. For seat
occupancy recognition – see page 122.
Picture no: 17424t.tif
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be identified by a
sticker on the child restraint system –
see illustration.
127
Picture no: 17091t.tif
Mounting brackets 3 for
ISO-FIX child restraint systems
The brackets located between the backrest
and seat cushion are used for mounting
ISO-FIX child restraint systems.
The instructions accompanying the ISO-FIX
child restraint system are to be expressly
followed.
Only ISO-FIX child restraint systems
approved for the vehicle may be used.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
128
Safety systems
Child restraint system 3
The Vauxhall child restraint system is
designed specifically for your Vauxhall and
thus provides optimum safety for your child
in the event of impact. If a different child
safety seat is used, follow the
manufacturers’ instructions for fitting and
use.
Selecting the right system
Your child should be transported facing
rearward in the vehicle as long as possible.
Change the system when the height of the
child is such that the head extends over the
top of the system and is no longer
supported at eye level. The child’s neck
area is still very weak. In the event of an
accident, they are subjected to less stress in
the semi-prone rearward position than
when upright.
Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1)
Weight and age
class2)
On front
passenger’s seat
On
outer rear seats
On
centre rear seat3)
0:
up to 10 kg
or approx.
10 months
B 1, +
U, +
U
0+:
up to 13 kg
or approx.
2 years
B 1, +
U, +
U
I:
9 to 18 kg
or approx.
8 months to 4 years
B 2, +
U, +
U
II:
15 to 25 kg
or approx.
3 to 7 years
–
U
U
III:
22 to 36 kg
or approx.
6 to 12 years
–
U
U
1)
2)
3)
For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed on
one of the outer rear seats.
We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit.
Not on Astra TwinTop.
Safety systems
B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
recognition and Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders.
If the child restraint system is being
secured using a three-point seat
belt, move seat height adjustment 3
to uppermost position. Move front
passenger’s seat as far back as
possible and move front
passenger’s seat belt anchorage
point to lowest position.
B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
recognition and Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders.
If the child restraint system is being
secured using a three-point seat
belt, move seat height adjustment 3
to uppermost position. Move front
passenger’s seat as far back as
possible so that vehicle safety belt
runs from anchorage point towards
the front.
U = Universal suitability in conjunction
with three-point seat belt.
+
–
= Vehicle seat with ISO-FIX mounting
available. When mounting with
ISO-FIX, only ISO-FIX child restraint
systems that have been approved
for the vehicle may be used. We
recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
= No child restraint system permitted
in this weight class.
129
Note
z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm
tall should only travel in an appropriate
child safety seat.
z When transporting children, use the child
restraint systems suitable for the child’s
weight.
z Ensure correct installation of child
restraint system, see the instructions
enclosed with the system.
z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint
system can be wiped clean.
z Do not stick anything on the child
restraint systems and do not cover them
with any other materials.
z Only allow the child to enter and exit on
the side of the vehicle facing away from
the road.
z A child restraint system which has been
subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced.
130
Safety systems
Rollover protection system 3
The Astra TwinTop is equipped with
rollover protection with reinforced
windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind
the rear seat head restraints. Depending
on the model variant, the anti-roll bars are
either fixed or deploy automatically in the
event of an impact of a certain severity.
The subsequent description only regards
the model variant with automatically
deployed anti-roll bars 3.
Picture no: 17974t.tif
In the event of a rollover, the anti-roll bars
deploy upwards in a matter of
milliseconds. They also deploy together
with the front and side airbag systems,
helping to optimise occupant protection.
The system deploys whether the roof is
open or closed. Roof operation is not
possible if the anti-roll bars are extended.
Picture no: 17105t.tif
Control indicator v for anti-roll bars
The deployable anti-roll bars are
monitored electronically together with the
belt tensioners and the airbag systems.
Their operational readiness is indicated by
control indicator v in the instrument panel.
When the ignition is switched on, the
control indicator v illuminates for approx.
4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does
not go out after 4 seconds or illuminates
whilst driving, there is a fault in or
deployment of the anti-roll bars, belt
tensioners and airbag systems –
see page 112. The systems may fail to
trigger in the event of an accident.
Deployment of the anti-roll bars is
indicated by continuous illumination of v.
Safety systems
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
9 Warning
The roof cannot be closed or opened if
the anti-roll bars are extended. The antiroll bars must first be retracted.
If an attempt is made to operate the roof
while the anti-roll bars are extended, a
continuous signal will sound as a
warning.
Picture no: 17992t.tif
Extended anti-roll bars
Can be retracted (e.g. in order to close the
roof after a collision).
Press the lever between the rods of an antiroll bar to unlock the system. Push the antiroll bar all the way down until it engaged.
Fit the cover.
Repeat the procedure on the other anti-roll
bar.
Control indicator v, however, will remain
illuminated and the anti-roll bars will not
deploy in the event of another collision.
131
Note
z Do not place any objects on the covers of
the anti-roll bars behind the head
restraints. They would be propelled
through the vehicle in an uncontrolled
fashion should the anti-roll bars deploy.
Such objects could also prevent the antiroll bars from extending.
z Do not operate the roof while the antiroll bars are extended. Parts of the roof
could be damaged during such
operation.
z Deployment of the anti-roll bars is
indicated by illumination of control
indicator v.
z Manually retracted anti-roll bars will
not deploy in the event of a collision.
z After deployment, the anti-roll bar
system must be serviced immediately.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
132
Safety systems
Picture no: 17120t.tif
Exterior mirrors
For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior
mirrors will swing out of their normal
mounting position if they are bumped with
sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by
applying slight pressure to the mirror
housing.
Aspherical exterior mirror 3
Increases the field of view. Estimating the
distance away of vehicles following you is
only possible to a limited extent because of
slight distortion.
Picture no: 17121t.tif
Automatic anti-dazzle interior
mirror 3
Dazzle at night is automatically reduced.
With the ignition off, the mirror does not
dim.
Setting – see page 6.
Sunvisors, glove compartment
The mirror covers in the sunvisors and the
glove compartment should be closed whilst
driving.
Picture no: 16991t.tif
Hazard warning lights
If the airbags are triggered, the hazard
warning lights are automatically activated
and the central locking system unlocks all
doors. Press button ¨ twice to switch off
the hazard warning lights.
Safety systems
133
Head restraints
Safety accessories 3
Do not mount any object or component on
the head restraint unless it has been
specifically released for your Astra for this
purpose. They impair the protective
properties of the head restraint and could
be thrown forward through the vehicle in
the event of heavy braking or an accident.
The wide range of Vauxhall accessories
allows you to equip your Astra in
accordance with your own wishes. In
addition to safety accessories, items for
improving comfort and a complete range
of vehicle care products you will find many
articles which will be of great value to you
when needed.
"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"
guarantee high quality and accurate fit.
Picture no: 17011t.tif
Active head restraints 3
In the event of a rear-end impact, the
active head restraints automatically tilt
forwards. The head is more effectively
supported by the head restraint and the
danger of whiplash in the neck area is
reduced.
Active head restraints are identified by
the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint
guide sleeves.
Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be
happy to advise you, for example with
regard to:
z Vauxhall child restraint systems
z Tow ropes
z Tow rods
z Jump leads
z Spare bulb kit
z Spare fuse kit
z Halogen fog lights
z Mudflaps
z Warning triangle
z First-aid kit (cushion)
134
Lighting
Lighting
Automatic dipped beam activation 3
Front fog lights > 3............................
Fog tail light r ....................................
Turn signals, hazard warning lights...
Reversing lights....................................
Headlight range adjustment ? ..........
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) ..
Door-to-door lighting function ...........
Parking lights 3 ...................................
Instrument illumination,
information display illumination ......
Courtesy light .......................................
Puddle light 3 ......................................
Battery discharge protection..............
Light covers..........................................
Headlights when driving abroad .......
Model variants with daytime running
lights 3: parking lights are on when the
ignition is switched on and the light switch
is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped beam is on
when the engine is running.
135
135
135
135
135
136
137
138
138
138
139
140
140
140
140
The daytime running lights switch off when
the ignition is switched off.
Follow the regulations of the country in
which you are driving when using daytime
running lights and front fog lights 3.
Driving abroad – see page 140.
Picture no: 17122t.tif
Exterior lights
Turn light switch:
7 = Off
8 = Parking lights
9 = Dipped beam, main beam
Dipped beam, main beam and headlight
flash – see page 15.
In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and
number plate lights are also on.
Control indicator 8 – see page 39.
Lighting
135
Fog tail light r
On
=
Off
=
Press r, r illuminates
in instrument panel
Press r again or
switch ignition or light off
The fog tail light can only be switched on
both the ignition and dipped beam /
parking lights are on.
The vehicle fog tail light are deactivated
when towing.
Picture no: 17123t.tif
Automatic dipped beam
activation 3
Light switch to AUTO: dipped beam comes
on automatically when the engine is
running if outside light conditions warrant
such.
The exterior lights switch off when the
ignition is switched off.
For reasons of safety, the light switch
should always remain in the AUTO
position.
Picture no: 17124t.tif
Front fog lights > 3
On
=
Off
=
Press >, > illuminates
in instrument panel
Press > again or
switch ignition or light off
The front fog lights can only be switched on
when both the ignition and lights are on.
Turn signals,
hazard warning lights
see page 15.
Reversing lights
Come on when reverse gear is engaged
and ignition is switched on.
136
Lighting
Vehicles without level control system
z Front seats occupied
=
0
z All seats occupied
=
1
z All seats occupied and
luggage compartment load =
2
z Driver’s seat occupied and
luggage compartment load =
3
Vehicles with level control system
Picture no: 17125t.tif
Headlight range adjustment ?
Manual headlight range adjustment
With dipped beam switched on, adjust
headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle
load. Turn wheel against resistance and
click it to the required position.
Correct adjustment of the headlight range
reduces dazzle for other road users.
Automatic Level Control system 3 –
see page 216.
z Front seats occupied
=
0
z All seats occupied
=
1
z All seats occupied and
luggage compartment load =
1
z Driver’s seat occupied and
luggage compartment load =
2
Automatic headlight range adjustment 3
On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the
range of the headlights is adjusted
automatically based on vehicle load.
Lighting
Picture no: 17126t.tif
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3
(AFL)
AFL improves lighting in curves (curve
lighting) on vehicles with Bi-Xenon
headlight system.
Picture no:
Curve lighting
The Xenon light beam pivots based on
steering wheel position and speed (from
approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)).
The headlights shine at an angle of up
to 15° to the right or left of the direction
of travel.
Motorway lighting
At higher speeds and continuous
straight ahead travel, the dipped
beam automatically raises slightly,
thereby increasing headlight range.
137
Picture no: 17127t.tif
Control indicator light B
Illuminated: fault in system. The system is
not ready for operation.
If the cornering light swivelling device fails,
the relevant dipped beam is switched off.
The corresponding front fog light is
automatically switched on for reasons of
safety.
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
If control indicator B flashes for approx.
4 seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the headlights have been set to
symmetrical dipped beam; see "Headlights
when driving abroad" on page 140.
138
Lighting
Picture no: 17128t.tif
Picture no: 17129t.tif
Door-to-door lighting function
Parking lights 3
The dipped beam and reversing lights
come on for approx. 30 seconds after the
driver’s door is closed, serving as door-todoor lighting after exiting from the vehicle.
The front parking light and tail light of one
side of the vehicle can be activated when
parking:
To activate function:
1. Switch off ignition.
2. Ignition off.
2. Remove ignition key.
3. Open driver’s door.
4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering
wheel.
If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will
go out after two minutes.
Door-to-door lighting can be deactivated
by inserting the key in the starter switch or
by pulling the turn signal stalk toward the
steering wheel again while the driver’s door
is open.
1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3.
3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up
(right parking light) or down (left parking
light).
An acoustic signal sounds and control
indicator O illuminates briefly in the
instrument panel to indicate activation.
To switch it off, switch on the ignition or
move the turn signal stalk in the opposite
direction.
Picture no: 17130t.tif
Instrument illumination,
information display illumination
Comes on when ignition is switched on.
Brightness can be adjusted when the
exterior lights are on: push to release
knob k and then turn it clockwise or
anticlockwise and hold until the desired
brightness is obtained.
Display mode 3 – see page 58.
Lighting
Picture no: 17131t.tif
Courtesy light
Front courtesy light
Comes on automatically when the vehicle is
unlocked with the remote control, when a
door is opened or when the key is removed
from the starter switch after the ignition is
switched off.
Goes off automatically after a delay when
the doors are closed or immediately when
the ignition is switched on or the doors are
locked.
To operate manually from inside when
the doors are closed:
On
Off
=
=
Press button c
Press button c again
Picture no: 17132t.tif
Front reading lights 3
Left and right reading lights are
individually operable. With ignition on:
On
Off
=
=
Press button a
Press button a again
139
Picture no: 17133t.tif
Courtesy lights and rear reading lights 3
Centre switch position: the rear courtesy
light comes on together with the front one
when a door is open.
The rear reading lights on the left and right
can be switched on separately.
With ignition on:
On
Off
=
=
Switch position I
Switch position 0
140
Lighting
Entry lighting 3
After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument
and switch lighting come on for a few
seconds.
Door handle lighting 3
When the exterior lights are on, the interior
front door handles are illuminated.
Illuminated mirror in the sunvisors 3
The lighting switches on when the cover is
opened.
Glove compartment lighting
on when lid is open.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray
illumination 3
Comes on when ignition is switched on.
Luggage compartment lighting
Comes on when the boot lid / tailgate is
opened.
Automatically regulated centre console
lighting 3
Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.
Daylight-dependent, automatically
regulated centre console lighting with
ignition switched on.
Puddle light 3
After unlocking the vehicle, the number
plate lights come on for a few seconds.
Battery discharge protection
Do as follows to prevent glare:
To prevent the battery from becoming
discharged, the courtesy light, reading
lights, luggage compartment lighting and
glove compartment lighting switch off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition
is switched off.
Vehicles with halogen headlight
system or Xenon headlight system 3
Have the headlights adjusted by a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Light covers
The inside of the light covers may mist up
briefly in poor, wet and cold weather
conditions, in heavy rain or after washing.
The mist disappears quickly by itself; to
help, switch on the lights.
Headlights when driving abroad
The asymmetrical dipped beam increases
the field of vision on the passenger’s side of
the lane.
This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the
vehicle is driven in countries where traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road.
Vehicles with Adaptive Forward
Lighting 3
(AFL)
1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on
steering wheel (headlight flash).
2. Switch on ignition.
3. After approx. 3 seconds, an acoustic
signal sounds and then AFL control
indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds.
After the switch, AFL control indicator B
flashes for 4 seconds each time the ignition
is switched on.
To return to asymmetrical dipped beam,
pull and hold the main beam stalk again,
switch on the ignition and wait for the
acoustic signal. AFL control indicator B
will then discontinue flashing.
Control indicator B – see page 42.
Windows, sunroof
Windows, sunroof
141
9 Warning
Take care when operating the electrically
operated windows 3 and the sunroof 3.
Risk of injury, particularly to children.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly.
If there are children on the rear seat,
switch on the child safety system 3 for
the electrically operated door windows.
Electrically operated door windows 3 141
Panoramic windscreen 3 .................... 144
Sunroof 3 ............................................. 144
Keep a close watch on the windows and
sunroof when closing them. Ensure that
nothing becomes trapped in them as
they move.
To prevent unauthorised operation,
switch ignition off, remove ignition key 3
and open driver’s door.
Electrically operated door
windows 3
The electrically operated door windows
can be used
z with ignition on,
z within 5 minutes of switching ignition
off 3,
z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key
to position 1.
Operational readiness ends when the
driver’s door is opened.
Picture no: 17134t.tif
Operated via two or four 3 switches in the
driver’s door handle. The front switches are
for the driver and front passenger’s doors.
The rear switches 3 are for the rear doors.
Additional switches are located in the front
passenger’s door and rear doors 3.
For incremental operation, briefly pull or
press the switch. For automatic opening or
closing, pull or press the switch longer. Pull
or press the switch again to stop the
movement.
142
Windows, sunroof
Picture no: 17135t.tif
Picture no: 17136t.tif
Safety function
If the window glass encounters resistance
above the middle of the window during
automatic closing, it is immediately
stopped and the window opened again.
Child safety system for rear windows 3
Switch z between the rear switches in the
driver’s door handle
In the event of difficulty due to frost or the
like, press the relevant window switch
several times until the window is closed.
z rearward (green field visible): rear door
switches operational.
z forward (red field visible): rear door
switches non-operational,
Picture no: 17976t.tif
Central switch for electrically operated
door windows,
Astra TwinTop
Button $ or " in the roof console.
Press button $: all windows are closed.
Press button $: all windows are opened.
Windows, sunroof
143
Overload
If the windows are repeatedly operated at
short intervals, the power supply is briefly
cut off.
The system is protected by fuses in the
fusebox – see page 261.
Fault
Automatic opening and closing of the
windows is not possible. Activate window
electronics as follows:
1. Close doors.
2. Switch on ignition.
3. Window completely open.
4. Close the window and hold the button
depressed at least 5 seconds.
5. Repeat for each window.
Picture no: 17046t.tif
Operating windows from outside 3
The windows of vehicles with electrically
operated windows in all doors 3 can also
be opened or closed from outside using the
remote control.
Radio frequency remote control with
mechanical key
Hold down button q or p of the remote
control until all the windows are open or
fully closed.
Picture no: 17034t.tif
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Hold down button q of remote control to
open. To close, hold down button p or
touch sensor in door handle for longer. The
electronic key must be recognised within
the external reception range. It is advisable
for the driver to keep the electronic key on
his person.
144
Windows, sunroof
Picture no: 17140t.tif
Panoramic windscreen 3
To open
Turn the handle to the right and move the
roof lining rearward to a suitable position.
Picture no: 17141t.tif
To close
Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
position. When moved all the way forward,
the roof lining engages in position.
Note
Close the sunvisors before sliding the roof
lining.
Picture no: 17138t.tif
Sunroof 3
Operated via rocker switches in the roof
console when the ignition is switched on.
For incremental operation, briefly press the
button. For automatic opening or closing,
press the button longer.
Windows, sunroof
145
Note
z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof,
allow water to run off and then open
roof.
To raise
When the roof is closed, press button ü.
The roof is tilted in the rear.
To open
Press button ü again from the tilted
position. The roof opens to its stop.
z When using a roof rack, check the
clearance of the sunroof to avoid
damage.
To close
Press button d.
For reasons of safety, the roof closes from
its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold
button d depressed to close the roof
completely.
Overload
If the system is overloaded, the power
supply is automatically cut off for a short
time.
Picture no: 17139t.tif
The system is protected by fuses in the
fusebox – see page 261.
Sunblind
Used to reduce sun penetration into the
interior when the sunroof is closed.
Fault
If the sunroof and sunblind do not operate
properly, activate electronics as follows:
The sunblind opens when the sunroof
opens.
1. Switch on ignition.
To open
Press button G. The sunblind opens to its
stop.
To close
Press button H.
For reasons of safety, the blind closes from
its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold
button d depressed to close completely.
2. Close the sunroof and hold button d
depressed at least 10 seconds.
3. Close sunblind and hold button H
depressed at least 10 seconds.
146
TwinTop
TwinTop
With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
a convertible.
9 Warning
Take care when operating the
convertible hardtop. Risk of injury.
Monitor the action zone above, to the
side and to the rear of the vehicle during
roof operation. Make sure that nothing
could become pinched.
TwinTop................................................
Wind deflector 3..................................
Rollover protection system .................
Luggage compartment.......................
146
149
151
152
Make sure no one is in the action zone of
the roof or boot lid during roof operation.
Risk of injury.
Check the amount height, length and
width of available space before
operating the roof, e.g. in a garage,
parking garage or when a bicycle rack
is fitted.
Vehicle passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Before leaving the vehicle, remove
the ignition key in order to prevent
unauthorised operation of the windows
and sunroof.
Picture no: 18024T.tif
TwinTop
Operating the convertible hardtop
Operational when the key is in position 1
in the starter switch.
Requirements:
z Vehicle is stationary or driving no more
than 20 mph (30 km/h).
z Luggage compartment blind is closed
and engaged – see above and
page 102.
z Boot lid is closed.
If any of the requirements are not fulfilled,
a warning buzzer sounds when the switch is
actuated and the roof does not open or
close.
TwinTop
Picture no: 17962t.tif
To open the roof
There must be no objects in front of the
rear window or in the pivot area of the roof
and boot lid.
Hold button > in the roof console
depressed until the roof is completely open
and the boot lid is closed.
An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
opening procedure.
Open the door windows slightly before
opening the roof. If button > is pressed
again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
door windows will close.
Picture no: 17970t.tif
The roof can also be opened with the
remote control when the vehicle is
stationary. Unlock the vehicle. Press
button q again and hold depressed until
the roof is completely open and the boot lid
is closed.
During operation with the remote control,
the door windows are opened completely.
147
Picture no: 17963t.tif
To close the roof
There must be no objects in the pivot area
of the roof and boot lid.
Hold button < in the roof console
depressed until the roof and boot lid are
completely closed.
An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
closing procedure.
Open the door windows slightly before
closing the roof. If button < is pressed
again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
door windows will close.
6
148
TwinTop
Indicator and warning buzzers
z Indicator buzzer upon completed
opening or closing of the convertible
hardtop.
z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising
or lowering of the electric luggage
compartment loading aid.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed
during roof operation.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully
opening during operation of the luggage
compartment loading aid.
Picture no: 17971t.tif
The roof can also be closed with the remote
control when the vehicle is stationary. Lock
the vehicle. Press button p again and hold
depressed until the roof and boot lid are
completely closed.
z Gong tone during roof operation if
vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph
(30 km/h).
z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully
open or closed.
z Three gong tones during roof or loading
aid operation if the luggage
compartment blind is not attached.
z Three gong tones during roof operation
if outside temperature is below –20 °C,
vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
system is overloaded.
z Continuous warning buzzer during roof
operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have
been triggered.
z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
minute before the end of the 9-minute
standby time with the roof in an
intermediate position.
z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
minute before the end of the 9-minute
standby time with the loading aid in a
raised position.
TwinTop
Note
z Do not open the luggage compartment
until the acoustic signal indicating the
end of the roof opening or closing
procedure has sounded.
Fault
The automatic drive of the roof is only
operational if the roof is in the proper open
or closed position.
z The luggage compartment blind must
always be closed during roof operation.
z the luggage compartment blind is
engaged in the closed position,
z There must be no one at the covers
behind the rear head restraints.
z There must be no objects in the pivot
area or the roof or on the covers behind
the rear head restraints.
z The roof can only be operated at
temperatures above –20 °C. If the
temperature is below this limit, a buzzer
will sound three times when roof
operation is requested.
z The roof can be held in an intermediate
position for 9 minutes to facilitate
cleaning of roof spaces. This is done by
disengaging the actuation switch. One
minute before the end of this period, a
continuous buzzer sounds as a warning
that the hold period is almost over and
the roof could start to move.
z Operating the roof while travelling on
uneven roads could lead to malfunction
and damage.
149
Check if:
z the boot lid is completely closed,
z outside temperature is above –20 °C,
z there is sufficient battery voltage,
z there is a system overload.
If the automatic drive is not operational,
two persons are required to manually close
the roof. See the accompanying
instructions for Astra TwinTop. We
recommend that you seek professional
assistance.
Picture no: 17964t.tif
Wind deflector 3
With the wind deflector installed
turbulence, draughts and noise in the
passenger’s compartment are reduced
when the roof is open.
The rear seats cannot be occupied when
the wind deflector is in place.
Do not place any objects on the wind
deflector.
The wind deflector is folded together in a
stowage compartment 3 in the luggage
compartment beneath the floor hatch.
If the vehicle is fitted with a spare wheel 3,
the wind deflector is in the luggage
compartment.
150
TwinTop
Picture no: 17965t.tif
Fitting
Take the wind deflector from the luggage
compartment.
Expand the collapsed wind deflector as
illustrated.
Picture no: 17966t.tif
Join together the unfolded ends of the wind
deflector: press in the pin at the slider,
guide the hinge over the pin and release
the slider so that the pin engages in the
hinge.
Picture no: 17967t.tif
Insert the guide clips of the wind deflector
in the seat belt recesses between the rear
head restraints.
TwinTop
151
Rollover protection system
To optimise safety in the event of a
rollover, the Astra TwinTop is equipped
with reinforced windscreen frame and
anti-roll bars behind the rear seat head
restraints. The anti-roll bars are fixed or
deployable depending on model variant.
6
Picture no: 17968t.tif
Pull the toggle of the right and left locking
pin and turn to lock. Straighten out the
wind deflector, turn the toggle back and
engage the locking pin in the recess in the
side trim.
Picture no: 17969t.tif
The wind deflector can be folded back
when not in use.
If the wind deflector is folded and the rear
seats are unoccupied, the wind deflector
can remain mounted in the vehicle when
the roof is closed.
Removing
Reverse the procedure to remove.
Stow the wind deflector in the luggage
compartment.
152
TwinTop
Picture no: 17975t.tif
Fixed anti-roll bars
are secured to the vehicle bodywork.
Picture no: 17974t.tif
Deployable anti-roll bars 3
are located between the rear head
restraints and the boot lid in such a way
that they are out of sight. In the event of a
rollover, head-on collision or side-impact,
the anti-roll bars deploy upwards within
milliseconds. The convertible roof must not
be operated if the anti-roll bars have been
deployed. A continuous warning will sound
if the switch is actuated. The airbag control
indicator v illuminates if the anti-roll bars
have been deployed.
Manual retraction of the anti-roll bars –
see page 130.
Further information – see page 131.
Picture no: 17973t.tif
Luggage compartment
The roof can only be opened if the load in
the luggage compartment does not
exceed the height of the luggage
compartment blind. The marked load
height (see illustration above) must not be
exceeded and it must be possible for the
blind to close flat. Otherwise, the roof or
load could be damaged when the roof is
opened.
Electrically operated loading aid for the
luggage compartment – see page 103.
Luggage compartment blind –
see page 102.
Climate control
153
Climate control
Air vents ...............................................
Cooled glove compartment 3 ............
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors 3 .................
Heated front seats 3...........................
Heating and ventilation system .........
Air conditioning system 3...................
Automatic air conditioning system 3
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 ....
Air intake ..............................................
Pollen filter ...........................................
Note ......................................................
Maintenance ........................................
155
155
156
156
157
160
162
167
173
173
173
173
Picture no: 17930t.tif
Heating and ventilation system,
air conditioning system 3
Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are
combined into one unit that is designed to
provide comfort regardless of the season,
weather or outside temperature.
When cooling 3 is activated, the air is
cooled and dried.
The heating unit heats the air as required
in all operating modes depending on the
position of the temperature switch.
The air supply can be adjusted to suit
requirements by means of the fan.
Picture no: 17142t.tif
The buttons for cooling n and air
recirculation 4 are only found on model
variants with an air conditioning system 3.
Air conditioning system 3 –
see pages 160, 162.
154
Climate control
The set values appear on the information
display.
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 –
see page 167.
Picture no: 17931t.tif
Automatic air conditioning
system 3
Provides a comfortable interior regardless
of the weather, outside temperature or
season.
When an interior temperature is set with
the temperature control, the temperature
and amount of inflowing air are
automatically regulated. A uniform,
comfortable climate in the vehicle is
thereby automatically obtained based on
outside climate conditions.
Automatic air conditioning system –
see page 162.
Picture no: 17143t.tif
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3
Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle
interior regardless of the conditions
outside.
To ensure a uniform and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature
of inflowing air, airflow rate and air
distribution are automatically adapted
based on the climate conditions outside
the vehicle and the current temperature
of the vehicle interior.
Climate control
Picture no: 17151t.tif
Air vents
Picture no: 17152t.tif
Pleasant ventilation to the head area
controlled by the position of the
temperature switch.
To close the vent, turn the vertical adjuster
wheel fully up. The symbol 0 appears. The
slats of the vent remain open although the
air supply is closed.
Centre and side air vents (1)
Vents open: vertical knurled wheel down.
Adjust the flow of air by turning the
horizontal knurled wheel.
Windscreen defroster nozzles (2)
Air distribution switch to l or J:
air flows onto windscreen and side
windows.
Additional vents
below the windscreen and door windows
and in the front footwell.
Picture no: 17171t.tif
Cooled glove compartment 3
Cooled air is fed into the glove
compartment through a nozzle.
If glove compartment cooling is not
required, slide the slider forward.
155
156
Climate control
General information, as well as
information on air intake, air
outlet, pollen filter and
maintenance,
see page 173
Picture no: 17147t.tif
Picture no: 17148t.tif
Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors 3
Heated front seats 3
Operation with ignition switched on:
Press switch ß one or more times to set the
desired heat output. The control indicator
in the switch indicates which of the three
heating levels is active.
On
Off
=
=
Press Ü
Press Ü again
Control indicator in pushbutton.
Heating works with the engine running and
is switched off automatically after around
15 minutes.
Astra TwinTop: The headed rear window
and heated exterior mirrors 3 are
deactivated when the roof is open.
Vehicles with diesel particle filter 3: the
heated rear window is automatically
switched on during particle filter cleaning.
Operation with ignition switched on:
We do not recommend prolonged use of
the highest level for people with sensitive
skin.
Deactivation: press switch ß repeatedly
until the control indicator goes out.
Front seat heating is operational when the
engine is running.
Climate control
Picture no: 17144t.tif
Heating and ventilation system
Left-hand rotary knob: Air distribution
L
to head area via adjustable
air vents and to footwell
M
to head area via adjustable
air vents
l
To the windscreen and
front door windows
J
to the windscreen,
front door windows,
to footwell
K
to footwell
Open the air vents when the switch is
set to L or M.
Picture no: 17145t.tif
Centre rotary knob: Temperature
Turn right
=
warm
Turn left
=
cold
157
Picture no: 17146t.tif
Right-hand rotary knob: Airflow
Four fan speeds:
x =
off
4 =
maximum airflow
The rate of airflow is determined by the
fan. The fan should therefore also be
switched on during a journey.
158
Climate control
Heating
The amount of heat is dependent on the
coolant temperature and is thus not fully
attained until the engine is warm.
The comfort and general well-being of the
vehicle occupants are to a large extent
dependent on a suitable ventilation and
heating setting.
For rapid warming of the passenger’s
compartment:
z Open air vents.
To obtain a temperature distribution for a
"cool head and warm feet", set the rotary
knob for air distribution to K or J and set
the temperature switch in the middle.
z Set the air distribution switch to the
desired position – see page 157.
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as
far as it will go.
Picture no: 17153t.tif
Ventilation
z For maximum ventilation to the head
area: set air distribution switch to M,
open all air vents, open slats of upper
and centre air vents all the way see page 155.
z For ventilation to footwell: set air
distribution switch to K.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the footwell: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set the temperature to the desired
setting.
z Set the fan to the desired setting.
z Activate fan speed three.
For vehicles with Quickheat 3, electrical
auxiliary heating warms up the
passenger’s compartment more quickly.
Climate control
159
z Set fan to 3 or 4.
z Open side air vents as required and
direct them towards door windows.
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
For simultaneous warming of the footwell,
set air distribution switch to J.
Picture no: 17154t.tif
Heating the footwell
z Set air distribution switch to K.
z Set the temperature switch in the
right-hand zone.
z Switch on fan.
Picture no: 17155t.tif
Demisting and defrosting windows
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp
weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
z Move air distribution switch to l.
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise
as far as it will go (warm).
160
Climate control
Air conditioning system 3
As a supplement to the heating and
ventilation system, the air conditioning
system cools and dehumidifies (dries)
inflowing air.
If cooling or dehumidification is not
desired, switch off cooling in order to save
fuel.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
Picture no: 17149t.tif
Cooling n
Operate only with the engine on and the
fan running:
On
=
Press n
Off
=
Press n again
Control indicator in pushbutton.
Picture no: 17150t.tif
Air recirculation system 4
The recirculation switch 4 is used to set
the ventilation system in recirculation
mode (control indicator).
If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate
from outside: temporarily switch on air
recirculation system 4.
Climate control
161
The air recirculation system minimises the
entry of outside air. The humidity
increases, and the windows can mist up.
The quality of the passenger’s
compartment air deteriorates which may
cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.
Air distribution to l: the air recirculation
system is automatically switched off to
speed up window demisting and prevent
fogging.
Picture no: 17156t.tif
Comfort setting
z Set cooling n as desired.
z Air recirculation system 4 off.
z Set air distribution switch to M or L.
z Set temperature switch as desired.
z Switch on fan at desired speed.
z Open vents as required.
Temperature switch in centre of
adjustment range: warmer air will flow into
the footwell and cooler air into the upper
zone, with warmer air coming from the side
air vents and cooler air from the centre
vents.
Picture no: 17157t.tif
Maximum cooling
Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escape rapidly.
z Cooling n on.
z Activate recirculation system 4.
z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Turn the temperature switch
anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold).
z Set fan to 4.
z Open all vents.
162
Climate control
z Cooling n on.
z Move air distribution switch to l.
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise.
z Set fan to 4.
z Open side air vents as required and
direct them towards door windows.
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
Picture no: 17158t.tif
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp
weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
Automatic air conditioning
system 3
Provides a uniformly comfortable interior
regardless of the weather, outside
temperature or season.
To ensure a constant and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
the inflowing air and the airflow rate are
changed automatically based on climate
conditions outside the vehicle.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
automatically compensated.
Climate control
Picture no: 17932t.tif
Automatic mode
Basic setting for maximum comfort:
z Set fan switch to A.
Picture no: 17933t.tif
Air distribution setting
L
to head area via adjustable
air vents and to footwell
163
Picture no: 17934t.tif
Temperature preset
Set the rotary knob to a value between
17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings
are possible.
M
to head area via adjustable
air vents
l
to the windscreen and
front door windows
For reasons of comfort, temperature can
only be changed in small increments.
J
to the windscreen,
front door windows,
to footwell
z All front air vents open. If desired, the
rear vents also 3.
K
to footwell
There is no temperature control for
settings below 17 °C (all the way left) or
above 27 °C (all the way right). The air
conditioning system works at maximum
cooling or heating.
Deactivation of the air conditioning
compressor can reduce the level of comfort
and safety – see page 164.
Open the air vents when the switch is
set to L or M.
z Set air distribution switch to desired
position - see next column.
z Use rotary knob to set temperature
to 22 °C (a higher or lower temperature
can be set as desired).
z Air conditioning compressor activation –
see page 164.
Intermediate settings are possible.
The selected temperature is maintained.
164
Climate control
Picture no: 17935t.tif
Airflow setting
1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting.
Intermediate settings are possible.
A
Automatic control of fan speed.
x
Fan off.
Fan speed is regulated to provide the rate
of airflow necessary to maintain the preselected temperature.
Picture no: 17936t.tif
Picture no: 17937t.tif
To activate / deactivate air conditioning
compressor (cooling) n
Operate only with the engine on and the
fan running:
On
=
Press n
Off
=
Press n again
Manual air recirculation mode
The air recirculation system prevents the
entry of outside air and the air in the
passenger’s compartment is circulated.
Control indicator in the switch illuminates.
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
recirculation mode. The quality of the
passenger’s compartment air deteriorates
which may cause the vehicle occupants to
feel drowsy. In operation without cooling
the air humidity increases, so the windows
may mist up. Consequently, manual air
recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.
Select automatic mode for the highest level
of comfort.
When cooling (AC compressor) is active, air
is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or
dehumidification is not desired, switch off
cooling in order to save fuel.
When the fan is off, the air conditioning
compressor is also off.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
Press button 4, the control indicator in
the button will illuminate.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:
press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button will go out.
Climate control
Heating
The amount of heat is dependent on the
coolant temperature and is thus not fully
attained until the engine is warm.
For rapid warming of the passenger’s
compartment:
z Set the air distribution switch to the
desired position – see page 157.
z Set the centre rotary knob to the desired
temperature. We recommend a value of
about 22 °C.
Picture no: 17938t.tif
Ventilation
z For maximum ventilation in head area:
set air distribution switch to M and open
all vents.
z For ventilation to footwell: set air
distribution switch to K.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the footwell: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set desired temperature.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be
manually set: set the rotary knob to
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be
manually set: set the rotary knob to
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.
165
For vehicles with Quickheat 3, electrical
auxiliary heating warms up the
passenger’s compartment more quickly.
The comfort and general well-being of the
vehicle occupants are to a large extent
dependent on a suitable ventilation and
heating setting.
To obtain a stratification of temperature
in the vehicle with the pleasant effect
"cool head and warm feet", set the air
distribution switch to K or J, set the
temperature switch to about 22 °C and
open the centre air vents.
166
Climate control
z Set temperature to maximum heating,
i.e. turn the centre rotary knob all the
way to the right (28 °C).
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
Operation with cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is not possible when outside
temperatures are low.
To switch off, press button V again; the
automatic air conditioning system will
operate at the settings selected previously.
Picture no: 17939t.tif
Maximum cooling for very hot interior
Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escape rapidly.
z Cooling n on.
z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Set the temperature switch to the desired
temperature.
z Set fan switch to A.
z Open all vents.
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 provides
maximum cooling down to the set value.
At settings below 17 °C (rotary knob all the
way to the left), the system continually runs
with maximum cooling. When the air
conditioning compressor is running, the
system is automatically set to air
recirculation.
Picture no: 17940t.tif
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp
weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
z Cooling n on.
z Press button V: in switch position A, the
fan automatically switches to the highest
speed and air is directed to the
windscreen.
Climate control
167
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3
Provides the greatest amount of comfort in
the interior regardless of the weather,
outside temperature or season.
To ensure a constant and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
the inflowing air, the airflow rate and the
air distribution are changed automatically
according to climatic conditions outside
the vehicle.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
automatically compensated.
Data is shown on the information display.
Setting modifications are briefly shown in
the information display, superimposing
over the currently displayed menu.
The display can vary according to the type
of presentation – see page 46.
The settings of the system are
automatically stored specifically for the
vehicle key used - see page 68.
Different settings are stored for each
remote control. Use of a remote control will
activate the settings associated with it.
Picture no: 17143t.tif
Manual settings e.g. operating without
cooling and air distribution can be selected
using the menu – see page 169.
When cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is active, air is cooled and
dehumidified.
The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen
and spores from the inflowing outside air.
Picture no: 17160t.tif
The automatic air recirculation system 3
has an air quality sensor 3 to detect
harmful ambient gases, in which case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
When set to automatic mode, the system
provides the optimal settings for almost all
conditions. If necessary, system settings
can be modified manually.
The system is only operational when the
engine is running.
Cooling (air conditioning compressor)
switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures.
168
Climate control
Picture no: 17000t.tif
Automatic mode
Basic setting for maximum comfort:
z Press AUTO button.
z Open all air vents.
z Air conditioning compressor activation –
see page 170.
z Set pre-selected temperature to 22 °C
using left rotary knob.
The temperature can be set higher or lower
as desired.
Switching off the AC compressor (Eco
appears in display) can reduce comfort
and affect safety – see page 170.
Automatic air recirculation mode 3
The ventilation system is set to recirculation
mode and interior air is recirculated.
All air vents are actuated automatically
in automatic mode. The air vents should
therefore always be open – see page 155.
The automatic air recirculation system has
an air quality sensor to detect harmful
gases in the outside air, in which case it
will switch automatically to recirculation.
If outside temperatures are low and
cooling (air conditioning compressor) is
switched off, automatic air recirculation is
only available in a limited capacity so as to
prevent the windows from misting. Activate
recirculation manually if so desired.
Switching automatic recirculation on or
off – see page 172.
Manual recirculation mode – see page 172.
Climate control
Temperature preset
The left rotary knob can be used to set
temperatures between 16 °C and 28 °C.
For reasons of comfort, temperature can
only be changed in small increments.
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
169
Air distribut.
Autom. blower
Auto. recirc
For vehicles with Quickheat 3, electrical
heating warms up the passenger’s
compartment more quickly.
If a temperature below 16 °C is set,
Lo appears in the display: the system runs
constantly at maximum cooling power. The
temperature is not regulated.
If a temperature above 28 °C is set,
Hi appears in the display: the system runs
constantly at maximum heating power.
The temperature is not regulated.
Temperature settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
Picture no: 17161t.tif
Picture no: 17162t.tif
Manual settings
Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or
misted windows), the functions of the
system can be modified manually.
Individual menu items are marked by
turning the centre knob and selected by
pressing it. Selecting certain menus by
pressing the knob will open a submenu 3.
System settings can be changed via the
centre knob, the buttons and the menus
depicted on the display.
To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or
right to Return or Main and select.
Press the centre knob to call up the menu.
The menu for manual system settings
appears in the display.
Manual settings are stored when the
ignition is switched off.
170
Climate control
The airflow can be increased or decreased
by turning the right knob.
To return to automatic mode: press
button V or AUTO.
Heated rear window – see page 156.
Picture no: 17163t.tif
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e.g. due to damp
weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
Press V button. V appears in display:
control indicator in button illuminates.
The temperature and the air distribution
are adjusted automatically, the fan runs at
a faster speed and the windows are rapidly
cleared of ice and moisture.
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
Autom. blower
… Auto. recirc
Air conditioning
on / off
Picture no: 17164t.tif
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning compressor
If no cooling or dehumidification is
required, switch the air conditioning
compressor off (maximum energy savings):
mark menu item AC from the manual
settings menu and select by pressing.
Eco appears on the display.
Inflowing air is neither cooled nor
dehumidified. This restricts the level of
comfort provided by the Electronic Climate
Control (ECC) 3. This may cause the
windows to mist up, for example.
To activate cooling: select menu item AC
from the manual settings menu and press
to activate cooling.
Climate control
Air distribut.
171
Automatic blower
Strong
Normal
Weak
Picture no: 17165t.tif
Picture no: 17166t.tif
Air distribution
Press the centre knob. The possible air
distribution settings appear one after
another in the display.
Airflow
Turn right-hand knob right or left. The
selected fan speed in indicated with x and
the number in the display.
Air distribution can also be set in the Air
distribut. menu:
At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air
conditioning compressor) are switched off.
Up
Air distribution to windscreen
and front door windows
To return to automatic mode: press AUTO
button.
Centre
Air to vehicle occupants
via front adjustable air vents
Down
Air distribution to footwell
Return to automatic air distribution:
deactivate corresponding setting or press
AUTO button.
Picture no: 17167t.tif
Fan control in automatic mode 3
Fan regulation in automatic mode can
be modified.
Select menu item Automatic blower from
the manual settings menu and select the
desired fan control.
Depending on the setting, the maximum
airflow, and thereby the noise level, will
increase.
172
Climate control
Climate
Air distribut.
AC
Autom. blower
Auto. recirc
Automatic
recirculation
air control at
bad outside air
Picture no: 17168t.tif
Residual air conditioning on
Picture no: 17169t.tif
Switching automatic recirculation 3
on or off
The automatic air recirculation system has
an air quality sensor to detect harmful
gases in the outside air, in which case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
Manual air recirculation mode
The air recirculation system prevents the
entry of outside air and the air in the
passenger’s compartment is circulated.
Select menu item Auto. recirc from the
manual settings menu and switch it on or
off by pressing.
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
recirculation mode. The quality of the
passenger’s compartment air deteriorates
which may cause the vehicle occupants to
feel drowsy. In operation without cooling
the air humidity increases, so the windows
may mist up. Consequently, manual air
recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.
Switch to manual air recirculation as
necessary.
Press button 4, the control indicator in
the button will illuminate.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:
press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button will go out.
Picture no: 17170t.tif
Air conditioning with the engine not
running
When the vehicle is stopped and the
ignition off, the heat or cooling power still
in the system can be used to condition the
passenger’s compartment, for example
when stopped at a level crossing.
Press AUTO button with the ignition off.
Residual air conditioning on will appear
briefly in the display.
The air conditioning will operate for a
limited period of time.
To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO
button.
Climate control
Note
If the windscreen mists up in damp
weather, temporarily set the system as
described under "Window demisting" –
see page 159, 162 or 170.
Cooling 3 is most efficient when the
windows are closed. If the interior is
extremely hot due to a long period in
strong sunlight, briefly open the windows
and sunroof 3 to allow the hot air to
escape quickly.
Picture no: 17438t.tif
Air intake
The air intakes in front of the windscreen in
the engine compartment must be kept
clear to allow air intake. Remove any
leaves, dirt or snow.
Pollen filter
The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen
and spores from the air entering from
outside. The active carbon layer 3
eliminates most odours and harmful
ambient gases from the air.
Replace the pollen filter at the intervals
given in the Service Booklet.
When cooling 3 (air conditioning
compressor) is switched on condensation
forms, which is expelled from the underside
of the vehicle.
At least one air vent must be open while
cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is
on in order to prevent the evaporator from
icing up due to lack of air movement.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
Do not cover the sensor on the instrument
panel as this could cause the Electronic
Climate Control (ECC) 3 to malfunction.
173
Maintenance
In order to ensure continuously efficient
performance, the air conditioning
compressor 3 must be operated for a
few minutes once a month, irrespective
of the weather and time of year. The
Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3, if
present, handles this automatically while
driving. Air conditioning compressor
operation is not possible when outside
temperatures are low.
If a fault occurs, consult a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
174
Easytronic
Easytronic
The semi-automatic Easytronic
transmission 3 permits manual (manual
mode) or automatic gearshifting
(automatic mode), both with automatic
clutch control.
9 Warning
Transmission display ...........................
Starting the engine..............................
Easytronic operation via
the selector lever ...............................
Move selector lever toward N.............
Starting-off...........................................
Electronically controlled driving
programmes ......................................
Winter programme T .........................
Kickdown ..............................................
Braking assistance from engine .........
Stopping the vehicle............................
Vehicle storage ....................................
"Rocking the car" .................................
Manoeuvring the vehicle.....................
Fault......................................................
Interruption of power supply ..............
174
174
175
175
175
176
177
178
178
178
179
179
179
180
180
Disregard of these instructions may lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Picture no: 17173t.tif
Transmission display
Shows the mode and current gear.
Starting the engine
The engine can only be started when the
foot brake is depressed. "N" is shown in the
transmission display and flashes if the foot
brake is not depressed.
It is not necessary to select the neutral
position before starting. If no gear is
engaged, the transmission automatically
shifts into neutral position (N) before
starting the engine. This can lead to a
slight delay when starting.
Easytronic
175
It is also possible to start off without
depressing the foot brake if the accelerator
pedal is operated directly after movement
of the selector lever. If there is no
immediate acceleration or the foot brake is
not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A"
flashes. After a few seconds, the display
resumes showing "N". Start off by
repeating the previously described
procedure.
In Automatic mode, selection of other
gears is automatic irrespective of driving
conditions.
Picture no: 17002t.tif
Picture no: 17174t.tif
Always move the selector lever in the
appropriate direction as far as it will go.
Upon release, it automatically returns to
the centre position. Pay heed to the gear /
mode indicator in the transmission display.
Starting-off
Depress the foot brake, release the
handbrake and move the selector lever
to A, + or -. Easytronic is in automatic
mode and first gear is engaged (second
gear if the Winter programme is active).
"A1" appears in the transmission display
("A2" if the Winter programme is active).
Move selector lever toward N
Neutral.
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot
brake is released.
Easytronic operation via
the selector lever
Move selector lever toward A
Switch between Automatic and Manual
mode.
Manual gearshifting is possible in manual
mode. "M" and the currently engaged gear
appear in the transmission display.
If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic
will automatically shift to a lower gear even
in Manual mode. This prevents the engine
from stalling.
176
Easytronic
If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on
movement of the selector lever to + or Easytronic shifts to manual mode and
changes up or down. "M" and the currently
engaged gear appear in the transmission
display.
Move selector lever toward R
Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is
stationary.
Picture no: 17002t.tif
Move selector lever toward + or + Shift to a higher gear.
-
Shift to a lower gear.
If a higher gear is selected when the
running speed is too low, or a lower gear
when the speed is too high, no shift is
effected. This prevents the engine from
running at too low or too high revs.
Gears can be skipped by moving the
selector lever repeatedly at short intervals.
Depress the foot brake, release the
handbrake and move the selector lever to
R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in
the transmission display.
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot
brake is released.
It is also possible to start off in reverse
without depressing the foot brake if the
accelerator pedal is operated directly after
movement of the selector lever. If there is
no immediate acceleration or the foot
brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged
and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the
display resumes showing "N". Start off by
repeating the previously described
procedure.
Electronically controlled driving
programmes
z By means of delayed gear changing
(higher engine speeds) following a
cold start, the operating temperature
programme in automatic mode quickly
and automatically brings the catalytic
converter to the temperature required
for optimum pollutant reduction.
z Adaptive programmes automatically
adapt gearshifting in automatic mode to
suit the driving conditions, such as if the
vehicle is towing a caravan / trailer, has
a high payload, or is being driven
on inclines.
Easytronic
177
If the Winter programme is activated,
SPORT mode is deactivated.
If the vehicle is switched to manual mode
while the winter programme is active,
the winter programme is interrupted.
The winter programme resumes upon
return to automatic mode.
Picture no: 17961t.tif
z When SPORT mode is engaged, shift
times are reduced and the transmission
shifts at higher engine speeds (unless
cruise control is on). SPORT mode –
see page 210.
z Winter programme: press button T –
see next column.
Picture no: 17175t.tif
Winter programme T
In the event of difficulties starting-off on
slippery roads, press button T ("A",
currently engaged gear and T appear in
the transmission display). Easytronic
switches to automatic mode and the
vehicle sets off in second gear.
The winter programme is switched off by:
z pressing button T again,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to protect the Easytronic the winter
programme automatically switches itself
off at extremely high clutch temperatures.
178
Easytronic
When the engine speed approaches its
upper limit, the transmission shifts to a
higher gear during kickdown even in
Manual mode.
Without kickdown this automatic shift is
not effected in Manual mode.
If SPORT mode is engaged, the drive
wheels may spin slightly when starting-off
with kickdown. This allows for maximum
acceleration of the vehicle.
Braking assistance from engine
Picture no: 17176t.tif
Kickdown
Accelerator pedal pressed past the
pressure point: below certain speeds, the
transmission shifts down into a lower gear.
Full engine power is available for
acceleration.
During kickdown no manual gearshifting is
possible.
Automatic mode
When driving downhill, Easytronic does not
shift into higher gears until a fairly high
engine speed has been reached. When
braking, Easytronic shifts down in good
time.
Manual mode
To utilise the engine braking effect, select
a lower gear in good time when driving
downhill.
Stopping the vehicle
In Automatic or Manual mode, when the
vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter
mode engaged, second gear) is engaged
automatically and the clutch released.
In R reverse remains engaged.
A warning buzzer sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the engine is running, a
gear is engaged and the foot brake is not
depressed. The vehicle creeps if the
handbrake is not engaged. Move the
selector lever to N and apply the
handbrake.
When stopping on gradients, engage the
handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To
prevent overheating of the clutch, do not
increase engine speed to ensure smooth
idling when in gear.
The clutch is automatically closed in the
event of overheating.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Easytronic
Vehicle storage
"Rocking the car"
Before leaving the vehicle:
z engage handbrake,
z remove the ignition key or, with the
Open&Start system 3, remove the
electronic key from the vehicle.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
move the selector lever between R and A
(or + or -) in a repeat pattern while
applying light pressure to the accelerator
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
sudden acceleration.
The most recently engaged gear (indicator
in transmission display) remains engaged.
With N, no gear is engaged.
When the ignition is switched off the
Easytronic no longer responds to
movement of the selector lever.
Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery
may become discharged if the vehicle
is parked for long periods.
If the handbrake has not been applied,
the control indicator R flashes for a few
seconds after the ignition is switched off.
With the engine off and the handbrake not
applied, when the driver’s door is opened a
warning buzzer sounds and the control
indicator R flashes; switch on ignition,
engage gear, switch off ignition and apply
handbrake.
179
This applies only to the exceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
Picture no: 17177t.tif
Manoeuvring the vehicle
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth
during attempts to park or in garage
entrances the creeping movement can
be utilised by releasing the foot brake.
Never actuate accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
To prevent damage, Easytronic
disengages the "creep" function when
the temperature of the automatic clutch
is high.
180
Easytronic
If F appears in the transmission display,
continued driving is not possible.
Have the cause of the fault remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The
system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows
faults to be quickly remedied.
Fault
Picture no: 17028t.tif
Control indicator A illuminates in the
event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In
the event of serious faults, F also appears
in the transmission display.
It is possible to continue driving if only
control indicator A illuminates. Manual
mode can then no longer be selected.
Picture no: 17178t.tif
Interruption of power supply
The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle
battery is discharged and a gear has been
selected. The vehicle cannot move.
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using
jump leads – see page 244.
Easytronic
If the interruption of power supply was not
caused by a discharged battery, consult
a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. If the vehicle must be
moved out of the flow of traffic, disengage
the clutch on vehicles with 5-speed
Easytronic. Disengaging the clutch is not
possible on vehicles with 6-speed
Easytronic 3. The vehicle must be moved.
Raise the vehicle by the front axle when
towing.
To disengage the clutch
(only on vehicles with 5-speed Easytronic):
1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition.
2. Open bonnet.
3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see
illustration) so that no dirt can get into
the opening when the cap is removed.
4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by
lifting upwards – see illustration.
5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using
a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 –
see page 251) until clear resistance can
be felt. The clutch has now been
disengaged.
Do not turn beyond the resistance,
since this can damage the Easytronic.
181
6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be
in full contact with the housing.
Towing the vehicle and starting the engine
is not permitted when the clutch has been
released in this way, although the vehicle
can be moved a short distance.
Consult a workshop immediately.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
182
Automatic transmission
Automatic
transmission
Selector lever settings P, R, N and D
(automatic mode) .............................
Gears 3, 2, 1 .........................................
Electronically controlled driving
programmes ......................................
Winter programme T .........................
Kickdown ..............................................
Engine braking.....................................
"Rocking the car" .................................
Manoeuvring the vehicle.....................
Stopping the vehicle............................
Fault......................................................
Interruption of power supply ..............
The automatic transmission 3 makes
automatic gearchanges possible
(automatic mode).
The engine can only be started when the
gear selector is in position P or N. When
starting in position N, depress the foot
brake or apply the handbrake. After
starting the engine, depress the brake
before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate
whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been
selected and the brake is released, the
vehicle will "creep". Never operate the
accelerator and the brake pedal
simultaneously. The selected gear is
displayed in the transmission display.
183
183
184
185
185
185
185
186
186
186
187
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions may lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Selecting D puts the transmission in
automatic mode.
Only select 3, 2 or 1 to prevent automatic
upshifting or as an aid in engine braking.
Picture no: 17022t.tif
Transmission display
Display of mode or selected gear in left
position of transmission display. The gear
that has been selected by the transmission
appears in the right position of the
transmission display.
P
Park position.
R
Reverse gear.
N
Neutral.
D
Automatic mode.
3, 2, 1
Selected gear 3.
Automatic transmission
The selector lever can only be moved from
P when the ignition is switched on and the
foot brake depressed (selector lever lock).
To engage P or R, push button on selector
lever.
The engine can only be started with lever in
position P or N. When position N is selected,
press foot brake or engage handbrake
before starting.
Do not accelerate during the selection
procedure.
Picture no: 17189t.tif
Selector lever settings P, R, N
and D (automatic mode)
P
Park position. Front wheels locked.
Only engage when the vehicle is
stationary and the handbrake is
applied. "P" on the transmission
display.
R
Reverse gear. Only engage when the
vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on
the transmission display.
N
Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the
transmission display.
D
Drive position for normal driving in
1st gear to highest gear. "D" and
the current gear appear in the
transmission display.
Gears 3, 2, 1
3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift
above the selected gear.
Press button on selector lever to
engage 3 or 1.
The current gear is displayed in the
transmission display.
183
184
Automatic transmission
z Automatic neutral shift function
automatically sets the transmission to N
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at
traffic lights.
The automatic neutral is activated when:
– the selector lever is in automatic
mode 3,
– the selector lever is in position 3, 2
or 1,
– the foot brake is depressed,
– the vehicle is stationary,
Picture no: 17961t.tif
Electronically controlled driving
programmes
z When SPORT mode is engaged, the
transmission shifts at higher engine
speeds (unless cruise control is on).
Control indicator 1 illuminates in the
transmission display. SPORT mode –
see page 210.
z Winter programme: press button T –
see next page.
– the accelerator pedal is not
actuated,
– the transmission fluid temperature
is greater than 0 °C.
As soon as the brake is released and the
accelerator pedal is depressed, the
vehicle starts off in the usual manner.
z By means of delayed gear changing
(higher engine speeds) following a cold
start, the operating temperature
programme quickly and automatically
brings the catalytic converter to the
temperature required for optimum
pollutant reduction.
z The adaptive programme automatically
tailors gearshifting to the driving
conditions, e.g. greater load or
gradients.
Automatic transmission
185
Engine braking
In order to utilise the engine braking
effect when driving downhill, select drive
range 3, 2 or, if necessary, 1 in good time.
The braking action is most effective in drive
range 1. If drive range 1 is selected at too
high a speed, the transmission remains in
second gear until the shift point for first
gear is reached, e.g. as a result of
deceleration.
"Rocking the car"
Picture no: 17190t.tif
Picture no: 17176t.tif
Winter programme T
Kickdown
Press button T if you are having problems
starting-off on a slippery road surface.
Depressing the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point: depending on the engine
speed the transmission shifts to a lower
gear. Full engine power is available for
accelerating.
To activate
The winter programme can be activated
in P, R, N, D and 3 (T illuminates in the
transmission display). The vehicle starts off
in 3rd gear.
To deactivate
The winter programme is switched off by:
z pressing button T again,
z shifting to 2 or 1 manually,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to prevent damage, the winter
programme switches off automatically at
high transmission oil temperatures.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
move the selector lever from D to R in a
repeat pattern while simultaneously
applying light pressure to the accelerator
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
sudden acceleration.
This applies only to the exceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
186
Automatic transmission
Stopping the vehicle
The selector lever can be left in the chosen
gear with the engine running.
When stopping on gradients engage
handbrake or depress brake pedal. To
prevent overheating of the transmission,
do not increase engine revolutions to
ensure smooth idling while standing if a
gear has been selected.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Picture no: 17177t.tif
Manoeuvring the vehicle
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and
forth during attempts to park or in
garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping
movement can be utilised by releasing
the brake pedal.
Never actuate accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
handbrake. Then select P. Remove the
ignition key or, with Open&Start system,
remove the electronic key 3 from the
vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the
battery may become discharged if the
vehicle is parked up for long periods.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P.
With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes
in the transmission display for 10 seconds
when the ignition is switched off if P has not
been engaged or the handbrake has not
been applied.
Fault
Picture no: 17028t.tif
Control indicator A illuminates after the
ignition is switched on. If it does not go out
after the start or illuminates while driving,
there is a fault in the automatic
transmission or engine electronics.
Automatic transmission
187
The transmission no longer shifts
automatically. Vehicle can continue to be
driven. Second gear is not available.
Forward gears 1, 3 and 4 must be shifted
manually using selector lever:
1
=
2
=
3, D =
1st gear
3rd gear
4th gear
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17191t.tif
Interruption of power supply
Picture no: 17192t.tif
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector
lever cannot be moved out of position P.
3. Push the yellow catch forward with a
screwdriver and move the selector
lever out of P.
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using
jump leads – see page 244.
4. Mount selector lever trim on centre
console and refit.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault,
release selector lever:
Re-selecting P locks the selector lever
again. Have cause of power supply
interruption remedied. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
1. Apply handbrake.
2. Disengage selector lever trim rearward
from centre console and fold upwards.
188
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
Automatic
transmission with
ActiveSelect
Transmission display ...........................
Selector lever settings P, R, N and D
(automatic mode) .............................
ActiveSelect (manual mode) ..............
Electronically controlled driving
programmes ......................................
Winter programme T .........................
Kickdown ..............................................
Engine braking.....................................
"Rocking the car" .................................
Manoeuvring the vehicle.....................
Stopping the vehicle............................
Fault......................................................
Interruption of power supply ..............
This automatic transmission 3 allows
both automatic gear changes (automatic
mode) and manual gear changes (manual
mode) 3.
The engine can only be started when the
selector lever is in position P or N. When
starting in position N, depress the foot
brake or apply the handbrake. After the
engine has started, depress the brake
before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate
whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been
selected and the brake is released, the
vehicle will "creep". Never operate the
accelerator and the brake pedal
simultaneously. The selected gear is
displayed in the transmission display –
see page 189.
189
189
190
191
192
192
193
193
193
194
194
195
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions may lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Selecting D puts the transmission in
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is moved to the left from
the D position, manual mode is activated.
Gear changes can then be made manually
by tipping the selector lever toward + or -.
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
189
The selector lever can only be moved out of
position P or N with the ignition switched on
and the foot brake applied (selector lever
lock). In selector lever position N the
selector lever lock is activated after a delay
and only if the vehicle is stationary.
Picture no: 17022t.tif
Transmission display
Display of mode or selected gear in left
position of transmission display. The gear
that has been selected by the transmission
appears in the right position of the
transmission display.
Picture no: 17193t.tif
Selector lever settings P, R, N
and D (automatic mode)
P
Park position. Front wheels locked.
Only engage when the vehicle is
stationary and the handbrake is
applied. "P" on the transmission
display.
R
Reverse gear. Only engage when the
vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on
the transmission display.
P
Park position.
R
Reverse gear.
N
Neutral.
D
Automatic mode.
N
M
Manual mode with display of
selected gear.
Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the
transmission display.
D
Drive position for normal driving in 1st
gear to highest gear. "D" and the
current gear appear in the
transmission display.
190
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
If the engine revs are too low the
transmission automatically shifts to a lower
gear, but not unless a certain speed has
been reached.
No automatic shifting to a higher gear
takes place at high engine revs.
For safety reasons, kickdown is also
available in manual mode – see page 192.
The selected gear is displayed in the
transmission display – see page 189.
Picture no: 17194t.tif
In position P or N, control indicator j
illuminates red in the selector lever
indicator strip if the selector lever is
blocked.
To engage P or R, push button on selector
lever.
The engine can only be started with lever in
position P or N. When position N is selected,
press foot brake or engage handbrake
before starting.
Do not accelerate during the selection
procedure.
Picture no: 17195t.tif
ActiveSelect (manual mode)
Move selector lever out of position D and
then forwards or backwards.
+
-
Shift to a higher gear
Shift to a lower gear
If a higher gear is selected at a speed that
is too slow or a lower gear is selected at a
speed that is too high, the gear will not be
changed. This prevents the revs from being
too low or too high.
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
z Automatic neutral shift function
automatically sets the transmission to N
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at
traffic lights.
The automatic neutral is activated when:
– the selector lever is in automatic or
manual mode,
– the foot brake is depressed,
– the vehicle is stationary,
– the accelerator pedal is not
actuated,
Picture no: 17961t.tif
Electronically controlled driving
programmes
z When SPORT mode is engaged, the
transmission shifts at higher engine
speeds (unless cruise control is on).
Control indicator 1 illuminates in the
transmission display. SPORT mode –
see page 210.
z Winter programme: press button T –
see next page.
– the transmission fluid temperature is
greater than 0 °C.
As soon as the brake is released and the
accelerator pedal is depressed, the
vehicle starts off in the usual manner.
191
z The operating temperature programme
automatically brings the catalytic
converter to the temperature that is
required for optimum emission reduction
after a cold start by selecting an
appropriate gear (increased engine
revs).
z The adaptive programme automatically
tailors gearshifting to the driving
conditions, e.g. greater load or
gradients.
192
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
To deactivate
The winter programme is switched off by:
z pressing button T again,
z changing to manual mode,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to prevent damage, the winter
programme switches off automatically at
high transmission oil temperatures.
Picture no: 17196t.tif
Picture no: 17176t.tif
Winter programme T
Kickdown
Press button T if you are having problems
starting-off on a slippery road surface.
Depressing the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point: depending on the engine
speed, the transmission shifts to a lower
gear. Full engine power is available for
accelerating.
To activate
The winter programme can be activated in
automatic mode (T illuminates in
transmission display). The vehicle starts off
in 4th gear.
For safety reasons, kickdown is available in
both automatic and manual mode.
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
Engine braking
"Rocking the car"
The automatic transmission automatically
selects the driving programmes with the
best possible braking effect.
If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
move the selector lever from D to R in a
repeat pattern while simultaneously
applying light pressure to the accelerator
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
sudden acceleration.
If necessary, lower gears can also be
selected in manual mode to increase the
braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest
braking effect.
193
This applies only to the exceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
Picture no: 17177t.tif
Manoeuvring the vehicle
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and
forth during attempts to park or in
garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping
movement can be utilised by releasing the
brake pedal.
Never actuate accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
194
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
Stopping the vehicle
The selector lever can be left in the chosen
gear with the engine running.
When stopping on gradients engage
handbrake or depress brake pedal. To
prevent overheating of the transmission,
do not increase engine revolutions to
ensure smooth idling while standing if a
gear has been selected.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
handbrake. Then select P. Remove the
ignition key or, with Open&Start system,
remove the electronic key 3 from the
vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the
battery may become discharged if the
vehicle is parked up for long periods.
The ignition key can only be removed when
the selector lever is in position P.
If the selector lever is not in position P when
the ignition is switched off, control
indicator j and P flash in the selector lever
indicator strip – see page 190, Fig. S 12103.
Move the selector lever to position P.
With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes
in the transmission display for 10 seconds
when the ignition is switched off if P has not
been engaged or the handbrake has not
been applied.
Fault
Picture no: 17028t.tif
If there is a problem with the automatic
transmission, control indicator A
illuminates. The transmission no longer
shifts automatically. The vehicle can
continue to be driven.
Illumination of control indicator A may
also indicate a problem with the engine
electronics – see page 206.
For diesel engines1) Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH,
illumination of control indicator A could
also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must
be drained of water – see page 294.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
1)
Sales designation – see page 309.
Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect
195
2nd gear and the highest gear can be
selected in manual mode. Depending on
the nature of the problem, only the highest
gear may be available.
Only the highest gear is available in D in
automatic mode.
Picture no: 17097t.tif
Interruption of power supply
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector
lever cannot be moved out of position P
or N.
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using
jump leads – see page 244.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault,
release selector lever:
1. Apply handbrake.
2. Remove the ashtray insert 3 or the
rubber covering on the bottom of the
stowage compartment 3 –
see page 106.
Picture no: 17856t.tif
3. To open, push the yellow catch down
with a screwdriver and move the selector
lever out of P or N.
4. Refit the ashtray insert 3 or rubber
covering on the bottom of the stowage
compartment 3 – see page 106.
Re-selecting P or N locks the selector lever
again. Have cause of power supply
interruption remedied. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
196
Driving hints
Driving hints
The first 600 miles (1000 km)
Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do
not use full throttle. Never allow the engine
to labour at low revs.
Make good use of all gears. Depress the
accelerator pedal a maximum of around
three quarters of the available pedal travel
in all gears.
Do not drive faster than three quarters of
maximum speed.
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the
first 125 miles (200 km).
Never coast with engine not
running
Many units will not function in this situation
(e.g. brake servo unit, Electro-Hydraulic
Power-assisted Steering (EHPS)). Driving in
this manner is a danger to yourself and
others.
Brake servo unit
When the engine is not running, the brake
servo unit is no longer effective once the
brake pedal has been depressed once or
twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but
significantly greater force is required for
braking.
Electro-Hydraulic Power-assisted
Steering (EHPS)
If the power-assisted steering fails when
being towed with the engine switched off,
the vehicle can still be steered, but
considerably more force is required.
Driving in mountainous terrain or
with a caravan / trailer
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
cooling power is therefore independent of
the engine speed.
Since a considerable amount of heat is
generated at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift down when
climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping
with the gradient in the higher gear.
Driving with a roof load
Do not exceed the permissible roof load –
see pages 234, 318. For reasons of safety,
distribute the load evenly and secure it
properly with retaining straps. Adjust the
tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do
not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h).
Check and re-tighten the straps frequently.
Observe country-specific regulations. Roof
loads are not permitted on the Astra
TwinTop.
Switching off the engine
When you switch off, fans in the engine
compartment may continue running for a
time to cool the engine.
If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
after driving in mountainous terrain: allow
the engine to idle for approximately two
minutes in order to prevent heat
accumulation.
Driving hints
Vehicles with turbocharged engine
After running at high engine speeds or high
engine loads, operate the engine briefly
at a low load or run in neutral for approx.
30 seconds before switching off in order
to protect the turbocharger.
Save energy – more miles
Please observe the running-in hints on the
previous page and the tips for saving
energy on the following pages.
Good, technically correct and economical
driving ensures maximum durability and
performance for your vehicle.
Overrun
The fuel supply is automatically shut off
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or when
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off
to take effect, do not accelerate during
overrun and, if in manual transmission
mode, do not declutch. To prevent
damage to the catalytic converter, overrun
cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the
catalytic converter temperature is high.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine
Flow-generated noises may be audible if
the accelerator is released quickly on
account of airflow in the turbocharger.
197
Engine speed
Cooling fan
Drive in a low engine speed range for each
gear as much as possible.
The cooling fan is controlled via a
thermoswitch and therefore only runs if
necessary.
Warming up
After a cold start, the automatic
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in
automatic mode shifts into higher gears
at higher rpm. This allows the catalytic
converter to quickly reach the temperature
required for optimum pollutant reduction.
Correct gear selection
Engine in neutral and without revving in the
lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and
driving at a speed too high for the selected
gear or transmission ratio increases wear
and fuel consumption.
Change down
When decreasing speed, shift down into
the next lowest gear. Do not slip the
clutch with a high-revving engine. This is
especially important when hill climbing.
Clutch operation
Always depress the clutch pedal hard to
the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and
transmission damage.
When driving do not use the pedal as a
footrest; this will cause substantial clutch
wear.
Vehicles with diesel particle filter 3: the
cooling fan comes on automatically during
particle filter cleaning.
Pedals
Do not place any objects in the footwell
which could slip under the pedals and
inhibit the pedal travel.
To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
there must be no mats in the area of the
pedals.
Battery care
When driving slowly or when the vehicle is
stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all
unnecessary electrical loads where
possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated
front seats).
Declutch when starting in order to relieve
the strain on the starter and the battery.
198
Saving fuel, protecting the environment
Saving fuel,
protecting the
environment
New painting techniques employ water as
a solvent.
End-of-life vehicle recovery
For detailed information on Vauxhall’s
on-going commitment to achieving an
environmentally sustainable future,
including; design for recycling, take back of
End-of-Life Vehicle (ELVs) and the
recycling of ELVs, view
www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details.
Energy and environment –
conscious driving
Trend-setting technology
When developing and manufacturing your
vehicle, Vauxhall used environmentfriendly and in the main recyclable
materials. The production methods used to
make your vehicle are likewise
environmentally-compatible.
Recycling of production wastes keeps the
circulation of material closed. Reduction of
energy and water requirements also helps
to conserve natural resources.
A highly advanced design means that your
vehicle can be easily disassembled at the
end of its working life, and the individual
materials separated for subsequent re-use.
Materials such as asbestos and cadmium
are not used. The refrigerant in the air
conditioning system 3 is CFC-free.
z High noise levels and exhaust emissions
are often a result of driving without due
attention to saving energy and
protecting the environment.
z You should therefore drive with energy
in mind – "more miles with less fuel".
Reduce the noise level and exhaust
emissions by adopting an environmentconscious driving style. This is extremely
worthwhile and improves the quality of
life.
Fuel consumption depends to a great
extent on your own personal driving
style. The following hints are intended to
help you consume fuel at a rate that is as
close as possible to the specified levels –
see page 313.
Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption
every time you refuel. This facilitates
early detection of any irregularities
causing increased fuel consumption.
Warming up
z Full throttle and warming up at idle
speed increase wear, fuel consumption,
exhaust emission, the amount of
pollutant in the exhaust and the
amount of noise.
z Drive off as soon as possible after
starting.
Uniform speed
z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
consumption, the exhaust emissions, the
proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
gas and the noise level.
z Do not accelerate and brake
unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed,
watching the road.
Avoid frequent starting-off and stopping
e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance
traffic and in queues of traffic by means
of clever planning. Select roads with
good traffic flow.
Idling
z The engine also consumes fuel when
idling.
z If you have to wait for more than one
minute, it is worthwhile switching off
the engine. Five minutes of idling
corresponds to approximately 0.6 miles
(1 km) of driving.
Saving fuel, protecting the environment
Overrun
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is
being driven down long gradients or
when braking – see page 197.
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come
into action and save fuel, do not
accelerate or declutch during overrun.
Correct gear selection
z High revs increase engine wear and fuel
consumption.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at
high engine speeds.
Making use of the tachometer helps to
save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed
range for each gear as much as possible
with uniform engine speeds. Drive as
often as possible in top gear, select the
next higher gear as soon as possible,
and only change down when the engine
is no longer running perfectly smoothly.
High speed
z The higher the speed, the higher the
consumption and the noise level. At top
speed, you consume a great deal of fuel
and produce excessive noise and
exhaust emissions.
z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal
results in distinct fuel savings with no
major loss of speed.
Drive at no more than around three
quarters of maximum speed and you will
use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a
great deal of time.
Tyre pressure
z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to
higher road resistance, costs money in
two ways: for more fuel and increased
tyre wear.
z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off.
Electrical loads
z The power consumption of electrical
equipment increases fuel consumption.
z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads
(e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear
window) when not needed.
Roof racks, ski-holders
z Due to air resistance, a roof load
can increase fuel consumption by
approx. 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100 km).
z Remove them if they are not being used.
199
Repair and maintenance
z Improper repairs or adjustment and
maintenance work can increase fuel
consumption. Do not carry out work on
the engine yourself.
You may out of ignorance infringe
environmental laws by not disposing
of materials properly.
Appropriate parts might not be recycled.
Contact with some of the materials
involved may pose a health hazard.
z We recommend that repair and
maintenance be entrusted to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Extreme driving conditions
z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
on poor roads and winter driving all
increase fuel consumption.
Fuel consumption increases dramatically
in urban traffic and at winter
temperatures, especially on short trips
when the engine operating temperature
is not reached.
z Follow the hints given above to keep
consumption to a minimum under such
conditions.
200
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling
Fuel consumption,
fuel, refuelling
Fuel consumption
Fuel for petrol engines
Fuel consumption is determined under
specific driving conditions – see page 313.
Commercially available high-quality fuels
are suitable (catalytic converter –
see page 203, octane numbers –
see pages 308, 309). Fuel quality has a
decisive influence on the power output,
running behaviour and service life of the
engine. The additives contained in the fuel
play an important role in this regard. You
should therefore only use high-quality fuels
containing additives.
Special equipment increases the weight of
the vehicle. As a result, they can increase
fuel consumption and reduce the specified
maximum speed.
For the first few thousand miles, friction
between the engine and transmission
components is higher. This increases fuel
consumption.
Fuel with too low an octane number can
cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held
liable for resulting damage.
Petrol with a higher octane number can
always be used.
Fuel consumption ................................
Fuel for petrol engines ........................
Fuel for diesel engines.........................
Fuel filler cap........................................
Refuelling..............................................
200
200
201
201
201
Pump nozzles for leaded fuel cannot be
inserted into the filler neck of vehicles that
operate on unleaded fuel.
The ignition timing adjusts automatically
to the grade of fuel used (octane
number) – see pages 308, 309.
Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95
will ensure economical driving.
For vehicles with Z20 LEH1) engine, use
of 95 RON fuel reduces performance
and torque.
1)
Sales designation – see page 308.
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling
Fuel for diesel engines
Fuel filler cap
Diesel engines must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel meeting
the specifications of DIN EN 590.
If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use
a genuine Vauxhall fuel filler cap for your
model to ensure full functionality. Dieselengined vehicles have special fuel filler
caps.
Since January 2004, some oil companies
have mixed their diesel fuel with upto 5%
Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in
accordance with the current DIN EN 590
and does not harm the fuel / injection
system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel
mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not
differ from conventional diesel fuel and do
not influence the vehicle’s driveability.
Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME
according to DIN EN 590 must not be
confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not
to be used in Vauxhall engines.
The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are
temperature-dependent.
Diesel fuels with improved low temperature
properties are therefore available on the
market during the winter months. Make
sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel
before the start of the cold weather
season.
Additives can be used with diesel fuels with
winter properties that are guaranteed by
the manufacturer and when using diesel
fuel filters that are heated depending on
the outside temperature.
201
Picture no: 17197t.tif
Refuelling
9 Warning
Care must be taken when handling fuel.
Before refuelling, switch off the engine
and where applicable any auxiliary
heating with combustion chambers (see
sticker on fuel filler cap). Switch off
mobile phones.
6
202
Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling
Correct filling depends to a large extent on
proper operation of the fuel dispensing
pump:
9 Warning
Fuel is flammable and explosive. avoid
naked flames or sparks when handling
fuel or just in its vicinity. Do not smoke.
This also applies where fuel is perceptible
only from its characteristic odour. If fuel
odours occur in the vehicle itself,
eliminate the cause immediately. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it
on.
2. After automatic switch off, the specified
tank capacity is reached after continued,
measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in
place until the stop.
To close, position the fuel filler cap and
rotate past the resistance until the cap
audibly clicks over the retainer.
Picture no: 17198t.tif
Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.
The tank flap is locked together with the
doors – see page 76.
Open the tank flap.
To open, unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove
and suspend from the tank flap.
The fuel tank has a limiting system which
prevents overfilling of the tank.
Close fuel tank cover.
Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
Catalytic converter,
exhaust gases
Damage to the catalytic converter or the
vehicle may result if the following points
are not observed:
z Consult a workshop, such as your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly
as possible in the event of misfiring,
irregular engine running following a cold
start, a significant loss of engine power
or other unusual malfunctions which
may indicate a fault in the ignition
system. If necessary, driving may be
continued for a short time at a low speed
and with a low engine speed.
Picture no: 17199t.tif
Catalytic converter for petrol
engines
Catalytic converter for petrol engines
Catalytic converter for diesel engines
Controlling exhaust emission..............
Exhaust gases ......................................
Maintenance ........................................
203
203
204
205
206
207
Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic
converter and parts of the electronic
system, rendering them inoperative.
High quality fuels other than those listed on
pages 200 and 308 (e. g. LRP1)) could
damage the catalytic converter.
On vehicles with a catalytic converter, the
fuel tank filler neck is of a narrow design so
that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel
cannot be inserted.
1)
LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
engine power when the Electronic
Stability Programme (ESP®Plus 3) comes
into action are the result of operating
conditions and are therefore of no
significance – see page 208.
6
204
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
z If unburnt fuel enters the catalytic
converter, this may result in overheating
and irreparable damage to the catalytic
converter.
You should therefore avoid
unnecessarily long use of the starter
when starting-off, running the tank dry
(an irregular fuel supply will lead to
overheating) and starting the engine
by pushing or towing.
z If the emission control indicator Z
flashes, slow down until the flashing
stops and the control indicator is steady.
Consult a workshop immediately. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer. For emission control
indicator Z – see page 205.
Catalytic converter for diesel
engines
Damage to the catalytic converter or the
vehicle may result if the following points
are not observed:
z Consult a workshop, such as your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly
as possible in the event of irregular
engine running, a significant loss of
engine power or other unusual
malfunctions. If necessary, driving may
be continued for a short time at a low
speed and with a low engine speed.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
engine power when the Electronic
Stability Programme (ESP®Plus 3) comes
into action are the result of operating
conditions and are therefore of no
significance – see page 208.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
205
Flashing with the engine running indicates
a fault that may damage the catalytic
converter. You can continue to drive
without causing damage by slowing down
until the flashing stops and the control
indicator is steady. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17004t.tif
Controlling exhaust emission
Through design-related measures – mainly
in the area of the fuel-injection and ignition
systems – the proportion of noxious
materials in the exhaust, such as carbon
monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and
nitrogen oxides (NOx), is reduced to a
minimum.
Picture no: 17352t.tif
Control indicator Z for exhaust
Illuminates when the ignition is switched on
and during the start attempt. Goes off
shortly after the engine starts running.
If it illuminates while the engine running
there is a fault in the emission control
system. The permitted emission values
may be exceeded. Consult a workshop
immediately. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
206
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it
is of no significance.
Illumination of A could indicate the
presence of water in the diesel fuel filter 3.
A text message will appear in the service
display at the same time – see page 44.
Have the fuel filter checked for moisture.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17028t.tif
Control indicator A for engine
electronics
Illuminates for a few seconds after the
ignition is switched on.
If it illuminates when the engine is running,
there is a fault in engine or transmission
electronics. The electronic system switches
to an emergency running programme. Fuel
consumption may be increased and the
driveability of the vehicle may be impaired.
In some cases, the fault can be remedied
by switching the engine off and on again.
If the control indicator illuminates again
when the engine is running, consult a
workshop to have the cause of the fault
remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
If it flashes after the ignition is switched on,
there is a fault in the electronic immobiliser
system. The engine cannot be started –
see page 67.
Exhaust gases
9 Warning
Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous
carbon monoxide, which is colourless and
odourless and could be fatal if inhaled.
If exhaust fumes penetrate the vehicle
interior, open the windows and consult a
workshop immediately. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
During the first drive smoke may develop
because of wax and oil evaporating on the
exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the
open for a while after the first drive and
avoid inhaling the fumes.
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases
Maintenance
Have all maintenance work carried out at
the intervals specified by Vauxhall. We
recommend that you entrust this work to
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who
has proper equipment and trained
personnel available. Electronic testing
systems permit rapid diagnosis and
remedy of faults. This way you can be
certain that all components of the vehicle’s
electrical, injection and ignition systems
operate correctly, that your vehicle has a
low level of pollutant emission and that the
catalytic converter system will have a long
service life.
You are thereby making an important
contribution towards keeping the air clean
and compliance with emissions legislation.
Checking and adjustment of the fuelinjection and ignition systems is part of the
scope of a Service. For this reason you
should have all maintenance work carried
out at the intervals specified in your Service
Booklet.
207
208
Drive control systems
Drive control systems
Interactive Driving System
(IDS+) 3
IDS+ unites the sensors and control units
of the Electronic Stability Programme
(ESPPlus), Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and
Continuous Damping Control (CDC).
This provides both excellent driving
dynamics and greater safety.
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESPPlus) 3
Interactive Driving System ..................
Electronic Stability Programme ..........
Continuous Damping Control 3 .........
SPORT mode 3 ....................................
Cruise control 3 ...................................
Parking distance sensors 3.................
Automatic Level Control 3 .................
Deflation Detection System ................
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 ...
208
208
210
210
212
214
216
217
218
ESPPlus improves driving stability when
necessary in any driving situation
regardless of the type of road surface or
tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels
from spinning.
The system monitors vehicle movements.
As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve
(understeers / oversteers) engine output is
reduced (the sound of the engine changes)
and individual wheels are specifically
braked. This considerably improves the
driving stability of the vehicle on snow and
ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces.
ESPPlus is ready for operation as soon as
the ignition is switched on and control
indicator v goes out.
When the ESPPlus comes into action,
v flashes.
The vehicle is now in a critical situation;
ESPPlus allows you to keep control of the
vehicle and reminds you to match your
speed to the road conditions.
9 Warning
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into taking risks when driving.
Traffic safety can only be achieved by
adopting a responsible driving style.
Drive control systems
209
Illuminates while driving
The system is switched off or a fault is
present. Continued driving is possible. The
driving stability can however deteriorate
depending on road surface conditions.
Reactivate ESPPlus or have the cause of the
fault remedied. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The system’s integrated self-diagnostics
allow faults to be quickly remedied.
Picture no: 17200t.tif
Control indicator v
Illuminates for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on. The system is now
ready for operation.
Flashing during driving
This shows the system has come into
action. The engine output may be reduced
(the sound of the engine changes) and the
vehicle may be braked automatically to a
small degree.
Switching off 3
With SPORT mode 3 engaged (LED in
SPORT button illuminated), the ESPPlus can
be disengaged for sports performance.
Hold the SPORT button depressed for
around 4 seconds. Control indicator v will
illuminate. ESP off will also appear in the
service display – see page 44.
9 Warning
Plus
ESP
should not be deactivated if there
is one of the run-flat tyres 3 has no
pressure.
Picture no: 17961t.tif
ESPPlus is reactivated by pressing the
SPORT button again or switching on the
ignition.
SPORT mode – see page 210.
210
Drive control systems
Continuous Damping Control 3
(CDC)
SPORT mode 3
SPORT mode is used to change
damping 3, steering 3, throttle
application 3 and the shift point for
automatic transmission and Easytronic 3
while driving.
CDC adapts vehicle damping to the current
driving situation and road conditions.
The system continually monitors wheel and
vehicle movements and immediately
modifies the damping of each shock
absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally
adapted to the driving situation and road
conditions.
When SPORT mode is engaged, the
damping control is adapted to a sportier
driving style ("harder" chassis calibration).
SPORT mode – see right column.
Damping and steering become more direct
and provide better contact with the road
surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
accelerator movements.
Picture no: 17201t.tif
Control indicator IDS+ for Continuous
Damping Control (CDC)
Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds after
the driver’s door is opened. If it illuminates
while driving, there is a fault in the system.
The system is not operational. For reasons
of safety "harder" chassis calibration will
be activated. Have the cause of the fault
remedied. We recommend that you consult
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The
system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows
faults to be quickly remedied.
For automatic transmission 3 and
Easytronic 3, the shift times are reduced
and gear changes occur at a higher engine
speed (except when cruise control is on).
Drive control systems
211
To deactivate
Briefly press the SPORT button again or
switch off the ignition. The LED in the
button goes out.
A long press deactivates ESP – see
page 209. SPORT mode remains engaged.
SPORT mode is deactivated if the Winter
programme 3 is switched on (vehicles with
automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3).
Winter programme –
see pages 177, 185, 192.
Picture no: 17961t.tif
To activate
Press the SPORT button. The LED in the
button illuminates.
In vehicles with automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3, control indicator 1 also
illuminates.
SPORT mode cannot be activated if the
Winter programme 3 is running (vehicles
with automatic transmission 3 or
Easytronic 3). Winter programme –
see pages 177, 185, 192.
Picture no: 17201t.tif
Control indicator IDS+ for SPORT mode
Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when
the driver’s door is opened. If it illuminates
while driving, there is a fault in the system.
The system is not operational. Have
the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
212
Drive control systems
Cruise control 3
Cruise control can store and maintain
speeds between 20 and 125 mph
(30 and 200 km/h). Deviation from the
stored speed may occur when driving up or
downhill.
For safety reasons the cruise control
cannot be activated until the foot brake
has been operated once.
Cruise control is operated with
buttons m, g, and § on the turn
signal stalk.
Do not use the cruise control if it is not
advisable to maintain a constant speed
(e.g. in situations presenting a danger to
yourself and other road users, in heavy
traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy
roads).
With automatic transmission 3, only use
cruise control in D or in automatic mode
with Easytronic 3.
When the cruise control is active, reaction
times may be increased due to the different
position of the feet.
9 Warning
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring that vehicle speed is
appropriate for the speed limit and
driving conditions – even if cruise control
is engaged. Failure to follow the
instructions could lead to injuries or
endanger life.
Picture no: 17202t.tif
Control indicator m
When driving, control indicator m will
illuminates as soon as the system is
switched on.
Drive control systems
Picture no: 16990t.tif
To activate
Briefly press button m: the current speed is
stored and maintained. The accelerator
pedal can be released.
Vehicle speed can be increased by
depressing the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the
previously stored speed is resumed.
213
Increase
With cruise control active, hold down
button m or briefly press it repeatedly:
speed is increased continuously or in steps
of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the
accelerator pedal.
To deactivate
Briefly press button §: cruise control is
switched off, control indicator m goes out
and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To
continue driving, depress the accelerator
pedal in the usual manner.
When button m is released the current
speed is stored and maintained.
For reasons of safety, cruise control
deactivates under certain driving
conditions.
Decelerate
With cruise control active, hold down
button g or briefly press it repeatedly:
speed is reduced continuously or in steps
of 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
When button g is released the current
speed is stored and maintained.
For example:
z the vehicle’s speed drops below
approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or
z the brake pedal is depressed or
z the clutch pedal is depressed or
z selector lever of automatic
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N.
Resuming the stored speed
Briefly press button g at a speed above
20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected
before the cruise control was switched off is
resumed.
The value of the stored speed is deleted
when the ignition is turned off.
214
Drive control systems
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when
reversing, a series of signals can be heard
in the vehicle interior. The interval between
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous.
9 Warning
Picture no: 17203t.tif
Parking distance sensors 3
Parking distance sensors make reverse
parking easier by measuring the distance
between the vehicle and an obstacle in the
rear, and giving an acoustic signal in the
passenger’s compartment.
The system records the distance using four
sensors in the rear bumper.
Picture no: 17016t.tif
To activate
The parking distance sensors activates
automatically when the ignition is switched
on and reverse gear is engaged.
Its operational readiness is indicated by
illumination of the LED in the button.
Under certain circumstances, various
reflective surfaces on objects or clothing
as well as external noise sources may
cause the system to fail to detect
obstacles. For this reason, care must be
taken when reversing even if the parking
distance sensors are operational. This is
of particular importance when in the
vicinity of pedestrians.
To deactivate
The system deactivates automatically
when reverse gear is disengaged.
To deactivate the system when reverse
gear is engaged, press button r.
The LED in the button goes out.
To reactivate, press button r again.
Drive control systems
215
If it flashes
The fault is due to sensors obstructed
with snow or ice. The sensors must be
undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice.
Caravan / Trailer towing equipment 3,
caravan / trailer towing
The system automatically detects if a
towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.
Interference due to external sources of
ultrasound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary
machines). Once the source of interference
is removed, the system will operate
normally.
When towing, parking distance sensors are
automatically deactivated when the trailer
cable is plugged into the socket.
Fitting rear load racks 3
Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted
near the sensors could disrupt the system.
Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on
page 149.
Picture no: 17204t.tif
Control indicator r for parking distance
sensors
If it is illuminated:
Fault in the system. The system is not ready
for operation. Have the fault remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The
system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows
faults to be quickly remedied.
216
Drive control systems
The vehicle is automatically raised at the
rear, increasing the spring travel and
ground clearance.
The Automatic Level Control system is
activated after approx. 1.8 miles
(3 kilometres), depending on the vehicle
loading and the nature of the road surface.
Headlight range adjustment –
see page 136.
Picture no: 17205t.tif
Automatic Level Control 3
Automatic Level Control makes it possible
to keep the height of the vehicle constant
when subjected to different loads in the
rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer).
This significantly improves driving
conditions.
In the event of malfunctions, do not utilise
the vehicle’s full load capacity. Have
the cause remedied without delay. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Drive control systems
217
Control indicator w
If control indicator w illuminates red while
driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop
immediately and check tyre pressures.
A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) is
permitted for run-flat tyres 3. Observe the
information on page 231.
Picture no: 17018t.tif
Deflation Detection System
(DDS) 3
The Deflation Detection System
continuously monitors the speed of all
wheels while driving. If a tyre loses
pressure, it grows smaller and rotates more
quickly than the other wheels. If the system
detects a difference in speed, control
indicator w illuminates red.
Stop immediately and check tyre pressure.
Mount the spare wheel if necessary –
see pages 249, 252.
The system is operational when the ignition
is switched on and can detect pressure loss
from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
If control indicator w illuminates yellow,
there is a fault in the system. Have the
cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
The control indicator flashes three times
when the system is initialising.
9 Warning
The Deflation Detection System does not
replace manual checks with a suitable
gauge.
Check tyre pressures at least every
14 days and prior to any long journey;
the tyres should be checked when cold.
Don’t forget to check the spare 3.
Tyre pressure – see pages 228, 326.
Picture no: 17019t.tif
System initialisation
After correcting tyre pressure or changing
a tyre / wheel, the system must be
initialised:
with the ignition switched on, press the DDS
button for approx. 4 seconds.
Control indicator w flashes 3 times.
The system is operational after driving
a certain distance.
Only initialise the system if all tyres have
the prescribed pressure.
218
Drive control systems
Tyre pressure monitoring
system 3
The tyre pressure monitoring system
continually checks the pressure and speed
of all four wheels while driving.
A pressure sensor is integrated in each
wheel. Once a minute, the pressure of each
tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is
compared. If the system detects one or
more pressure differences, a message
appears on the information display.
In vehicles with Graphical Information
Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3
and trip computer 3, current tyre pressures
can be shown in the information display.
For the system to be operational, all wheels
must be equipped with pressure sensors
and all tyres must be filled to the
prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure
monitoring system automatically detects if
the vehicle is being driven with a load of up
to 3 persons or a full load.
Once the ignition is switched on, the system
is operational and will continuously
monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of
approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above.
9 Warning
The tyre pressure monitoring system does
not replace manual checks with a
suitable gauge.
Check tyre pressures at least every
14 days and prior to any long journey;
the tyres should be checked when cold.
Don’t forget to check the spare 3.
Tyre pressure – see pages 228, 326.
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Picture no: 17334t.tif
Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Tyres from the Board
Computer menu.
The current pressure of each tyre is
displayed.
Warning messages
A message is given on the information
display to warn of inconsistent tyre
pressures. In some versions, the message is
displayed in abbreviated form.
For example, the following messages can
be displayed:
Drive control systems
Navi active
Navi active
Tyre pressure
Attention!
check rear
left tyre
(value in bar)
Front left tyre
pressure loss
(value in bar)
OK
Picture no: 17353t.tif
A graphic 3 indicating the left rear tyre is
shown together with the current tyre
pressure: slight pressure deviation. Reduce
speed. Check pressure at next opportunity
with appropriate gauge and correct if
necessary.
On the Colour Information Display this
report will appear in yellow.
OK
Picture no: 17354t.tif
A graphic 3 indicating the front left tyre is
shown together with the current tyre
pressure: significant pressure deviation or
direct pressure loss! Steer out of flow of
traffic as quickly as possible without
endangering other drivers. Stop and check
the tyres.
219
Mount the spare wheel if necessary –
see pages 249, 252. A maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat
tyres 3. Observe the information on
page 231.
On the Colour Information Display this
report will appear in red.
Acknowledgement of warnings –
see page 54.
220
Drive control systems
General information
The spare wheel / temporary spare is not
equipped with a pressure sensor. The tyre
pressure monitoring system is not
operational if the spare wheel / temporary
spare is in use. Control indicator w
illuminates yellow –.– appears in the
display of tyre pressures. Tyre pressure is
monitored by the Deflation Detection
System – see page 217.
Picture no: 17018t.tif
Control indicator w
If control indicator w illuminates yellow
while driving, there is a fault in the tyre
pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel
without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel)
will also generate a fault in the system.
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
Picture no: 17019t.tif
System initialisation
The system must be initialised after
a wheel / tyre change:
with the ignition switched on, press
button DDS approx. 4 seconds. Control
indicator w flashes 3 times. The system
is operational after driving a certain
distance.
Only initialise the system if all tyres have
the prescribed pressure (check when tyres
are cold).
If a complete set of wheels without tyre
pressure control system sensors is mounted
(e.g. four winter tyres), no error message
will be displayed. The tyre pressure
monitoring system is not operational.
The tyre pressure of a set of wheels
without sensors is monitored by the
Deflation Detection System (DDS) –
see page 217.
Drive control systems
Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring
system can be retro-fitted. We recommend
that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
When manually checking tyre pressure with
a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto
the valve. Tyre pressure – see page 326.
The tyre pressure monitoring system valve
cores and sealing rings must be replaced
each time the tyres are changed. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
The use of commercially available liquid
filled run-flat systems or repair kits can
impair the function of the system.
Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.
Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones,
walkie-talkies) operated in the area could
cause interference in the tyre pressure
monitoring system.
221
222
Brakes
Brakes
Brake system
The effectiveness of the brakes is an
important factor for traffic safety.
To improve effectiveness, do not brake
unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles
(200 km) after new brake pads have been
fitted.
Brake pad wear must not exceed a
specified limit. Regular maintenance as
detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore
of the utmost importance for traffic safety.
Brake system........................................ 222
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)........ 224
Have worn brake pads replaced. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that
have been tested and approved by
Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking
power.
Brake pads worn to their minimum
thickness generate a grinding noise.
Continued driving is possible. Have the
brake pads replaced as soon as possible
by a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17206t.tif
Brake assist
Rapid powerful application of the brake
pedal automatically applies maximum
braking force amplification to achieve the
shortest possible braking distance under
full braking (brake assistant).
Maintain steady pressure on the brake
pedal for as long as full-on braking is to
continue. When the brake pedal is
released, the maximum brake force
amplification is taken away.
Adaptive brake light
During full-on braking, all three brake
lights flash for the duration of ABS control.
Brakes
Foot brake
The foot brake comprises two independent
brake circuits.
If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be
braked using the other brake circuit. If this
occurs, however, the brake pedal must be
depressed quite far using considerable
force before braking effect occurs. The
distance required for braking will be
greater. Consult a workshop before
continuing your journey. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
To ensure the full pedal travel can be
utilized, especially in case of a fault in one
of the brake circuits, there must be no mats
in the vicinity of the pedals – see page 197.
When the engine is not running, the
assistance of the brake servo unit
disappears once the brake pedal has been
depressed once or twice. Braking effect is
not reduced, but braking requires
significantly greater force. This is especially
important to bear in mind when towing.
223
Check the brake lights before starting out
on a journey. On vehicles with check
control 3 the brake lights are checked
automatically – see page 62.
Shortly after starting each journey the
effectiveness of the brake system should
be tested at low speed and without
inconveniencing other traffic, especially if
the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle
has been washed.
The brake fluid level should be checked
regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low
and the handbrake is not applied, control
indicator R on the instrument panel
illuminates – see page 38.
Hill Start Assist 3 (HSA)
The system helps pull away on inclines.
After releasing the footbrake, if the
handbrake is not applied the brakes are
only released after 2 seconds. As soon as
the acceleration is sufficient to prevent
rolling back, the brake is released.
Picture no: 17207t.tif
Handbrake
Always apply handbrake firmly. On slopes
apply the handbrake as firmly as possible.
The mechanical handbrake acts on the
brakes on the rear wheels. It engages
automatically when applied.
To release the handbrake pull the lever up
slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully
lower the lever.
To reduce the operating forces of the
handbrake, depress the foot brake at the
same time.
224
Brakes
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)
ABS continually monitors the brake system
and prevents the wheels from locking
regardless of the type of road surface or
tyre grip.
Picture no: 17208t.tif
Brake system control indicator R
The control indicator illuminates when the
ignition is switched on if the handbrake is
applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is
too low. Brake fluid – see page 296.
9 Warning
If the control indicator illuminates when
the handbrake is not applied: stop.
Interrupt your journey immediately.
Consult a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
It starts to regulate the braking pressure as
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The vehicle remains steerable, even in the
event of very heavy braking, for instance
on bends or when swerving to avoid an
obstacle. Even in the case of full-on
braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive
round an obstacle without releasing the
brakes.
ABS control is made apparent through a
pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of
the regulation process.
9 Warning
For optimum braking, keep the brake
pedal fully depressed throughout the
braking process, despite the fact that the
pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the
pressure on the pedal.
Do not let this special safety feature
tempt you into taking risks when driving.
Traffic safety can only be achieved by
adopting a responsible driving style.
Brakes
9 Warning
If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may
be subject to locking due to braking that
is heavier than normal. The advantages
of ABS are no longer operational.
You can continue driving, provided you
drive with care and anticipation.
Picture no: 17209t.tif
Control indicator u for ABS
The control indicator illuminates for several
seconds when the ignition is switched on
and the system undergoes a self-check at
the same time (may be audible). The
system is ready for operation when the
control indicator goes out.
If the control indicator does not go out
after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while
driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The
brake system remains operational
without ABS regulation.
225
Have the cause of the fault remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. The system’s
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
be quickly remedied.
226
Wheels, tyres
Wheels, tyres
Tyres
See page 326 for suitable tyres and
restrictions.
Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to
the chassis and provide optimum driving
comfort and safety.
Changing tyre / wheel type
Before switching to different tyres or
wheels, seek advice on the technical
possibilities. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer,
who will be able to advise you of any
necessary modifications.
Tyres .....................................................
Changing tyre / wheel type.................
Tyre pressure........................................
Tyre condition, wheel condition .........
Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3..........................
Winter tyres 3 ......................................
Wheel covers 3 ....................................
Tyre chains ...........................................
226
226
228
229
231
232
232
232
If tyres of a different size than those fitted
at the factory are used, the electronic
speedometer may require reprogramming
to ensure that the correct speed is
displayed.
9 Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may
lead to accidents and render the vehicle
unroadworthy.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3
If winter tyres or tyres of a different size are
fitted, tyre pressure monitoring system
sensors can be retro-fitted if so desired.
Otherwise, the system will not indicate tyre
pressure deviations. We recommend that
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 –
see page 217.
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –
see page 218.
Vehicles with run-flat tyres 3
When switching wheels, e.g. when
switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres
as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair kit
in the vehicle.
Run-flat tyres 3 – see page 231.
Wheels, tyres
Fitting new tyres
Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even
better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are
z the same size,
z the same design,
z the same make,
z and have the same tread pattern.
Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
direction of travel. The rolling direction is
indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
the sidewall.
Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
(e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be
refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
way to obtain full benefit from the design
properties of the tyre.
Run-flat tyres 3 must not be combined with
conventional tyres.
9 Warning
We recommend that you have your tyres
changed by your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will be familiar with the
requirements of the law as regards
disposal of tyres and can thus help to
protect the environment and your health.
227
Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge
for alloy wheels to protect against
damage. If wheel trim is used on steel
wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the
following specification must be followed:
z Use of wheel trims and tyres that
approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in
question and thereby fulfil all
requirements for the wheel and tyre
combination.
z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not
have a beaded edge.
9 Warning
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims
could lead to sudden loss of air and
thereby accidents.
228
Wheels, tyres
Picture no: 17211t.tif
Tyre pressure
Check tyre pressure, including the spare
wheel, at least every 14 days and prior
to any long journey; the tyres should be
checked when cold. Don’t forget to check
the spare.
Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing
the valve caps easier. The key is located on
the inside of the tank flap.
Picture no: 17212t.tif
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
attaching tyre pressure gauge –
see page 218.
Picture no: 17213t.tif
After having checked the tyre pressure,
tighten the valve caps using the valve
cap key.
Tyre pressure – see page 326.
Incorrect inflation pressures will impair
safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel
economy and will increase tyre wear.
Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm. Otherwise the pressure may
drop below the permissible minimum
when the tyres cool down.
If the pressure is too low, this can result in
considerable tyre warm-up and internal
damage, leading to tread separation and
even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.
Wheels, tyres
Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by
adjusting the inflation pressure.
229
Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign
bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in
sidewalls). Check wheels for damage. In
the event of damage or abnormal wear,
consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
9 Warning
Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat
tyre.
9 Warning
Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.
Picture no: 17214t.tif
Tyre condition, wheel condition
Drive over edges slowly and at a right
angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges
can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel
damage which is only noticed later on.
When parking, ensure that the tyres are not
pressed against the edge of the kerb.
230
Wheels, tyres
General information
z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if
the tyres are worn.
z Tyres age, even if they are used only very
little or not at all. A spare wheel which
has not been used for six years should be
used with care.
z Never fit used tyres the previous history
and use of which you do not know.
Picture no: 17215t.tif
Tread depth
Check tread depth regularly.
If wear in the front is greater than that in
the rear, move the rear wheels to the front
axle and vice versa.
Correct tyre pressure. For vehicles with
Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 or tyre
pressure control system 3, initialise the
system – see pages 217, 220.
Picture no: 17216t.tif
The legally permissible minimum tread
depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when
the tread has worn down as far as one of
the wear indicators (TWI1)). A number of
wear indicators are spaced at equal
intervals around the tyre within the tread.
Their position is indicated by markings on
the tyre sidewall.
For reasons of safety, tyres should be
replaced when their tread depth has worn
down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).
1)
TWI = Tread Wear Indicator.
z So as not to impair brake cooling, use
only wheel trims approved for use on
your vehicle.
Wheels, tyres
Tyre designations
Meanings:
e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H
195 = Tyre width in mm
65 = Aspect ratio
(tyre height to tyre width) in %
R = Belt type: Radial
15 = Rim diameter in inches
91 = Load index
e.g.: 91 represents 618 kg
H = Speed code
Speed code letters:
Q
S
T
H
V
W
Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
Up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3
Run-flat tyres have reinforced, selfsupporting sidewalls, which ensure that the
tyres always have a certain amount of
driveability, even when there is no pressure.
Run-flat tyres are only permitted on
vehicles with ESPPlus and tyre pressure
monitoring system or Deflation Detection
System (DDS) 3.
9 Warning
231
Driving with a damaged tyre
A loss in tyre pressure is indicated by the
tyre pressure monitoring system 3 or the
Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3.
If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving
is possible
z at a speed of max. 50 mph (80 km/h),
z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 km).
9 Warning
Even the tyre pressure of run-flat tyres
must be checked regularly.
When driving with a flat tyre, do not
exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or a
distance of 50 miles (80 km).
Check tyre pressures at least every 14
days and prior to any long journey; the
tyres should be checked when cold.
The vehicle will be more difficult to steer
and handle and the braking distance will
be longer.
Depending on the manufacturer, run-flat
tyres can be recognised by the designation
ROF or SSR on the sidewall. They are only
permitted in combination with Vauxhallapproved alloy wheels. This also applies
to winter tyres.
Adapt driving style and speed to the
conditions at hand.
Do not use a tyre repair kit.
Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 –
see page 217.
Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –
see page 218.
232
Wheels, tyres
Winter tyres 3
Wheel covers 3
For notes on fitting new tyres –
see page 226.
If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the
tyres do not have a beaded edge –
see page 227.
Limitations – see pages 231, 326.
Winter tyres improve safety at
temperatures below 7 °C and should
therefore be fitted on all the wheels.
The design of summer tyres means they
have limited qualities for winter driving.
If the maximum permissible speed for the
winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle,
a notice indicating the maximum
permissible speed for the tyres must be
affixed within the driver’s field of vision1).
If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted
with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s
driveability may be affected, especially on
slippery road surfaces. Obtain a
replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as
possible, and have the wheel balanced
and fitted to the vehicle.
1)
Varies from country to country on account of
national regulations.
Picture no: 17217t.tif
Tyre chains
See page 326 for restrictions.
Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive
wheels (front axle).
Always use fine mesh chains that add no
more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the
inboard sides (including chain lock).
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Wheels, tyres
Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into
contact with parts of the chain and be
damaged. Remove the wheel trim –
see page 252.
Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up
to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when travelling
on roads that are free of snow, they may be
used for brief periods only since they are
subject to rapid wear on a hard road and
may snap.
Temporary spare wheel
Tyre chains must not be used on the
temporary spare wheel. If you need to use
tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
fit the temporary spare on the rear axle
and transfer one of the rear wheels to the
front axle.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel –
see page 250.
Wheel changing – see page 252.
Correct tyre pressure.
Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 –
see page 217.
Tyre pressure control system 3 –
see page 218.
233
234
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
Roof racks,
caravan and trailer
towing
9 Warning
Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Roof racks 3
For reasons of safety and to avoid
damaging the roof, we recommend that
you use the Vauxhall roof rack system
approved for your vehicle. Consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Roof racks 3.........................................
Towing equipment 3...........................
Towing equipment with
detachable coupling ball bar 3.......
Stowage of coupling ball bar .............
Caravan and trailer loads...................
Coupling socket load...........................
Rear axle load during towing .............
Tyre pressure........................................
Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) ............
Driving characteristics, towing tips ....
Starting on inclines ..............................
234
235
235
238
239
240
240
240
240
241
242
Picture no: 17218t.tif
Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra
TwinTop.
Model variants without roof railing
Lift the covers from the fitting openings.
Fasten the roof rack following the
instructions that accompany the system.
Attach roof rack at appropriate points,
see enclosed roof luggage rack system
instructions.
Driving hints – see page 196.
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
235
Towing equipment 3
Use only towing equipment that has been
approved for your vehicle. We recommend
entrusting the retro-fitting of towing
equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will advise you on any
possible towed load increases. Your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has
instructions on how to install the towing
equipment and make any necessary
changes to the vehicle that affect the
cooling system, heat shields or other
equipment.
Picture no: 17219t.tif
Model variants with roof railing 3
Attach roof rack to roof railing at points
shown in illustration, see enclosed roof
luggage rack system instructions.
Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on
page 149.
Do not mount towing equipment to
vehicles with Z 20 LEH1) engine.
9 Warning
The coupling ball bar is to be removed
when not towing.
For installation dimensions of the trailer
towing equipment – see pages 339, 340.
Picture no: 17220t.tif
Towing equipment with
detachable coupling ball bar 3
Stowage of coupling ball bar
In Hatchbacks, the coupling ball bar is in a
pouch, fastened in the luggage
compartment cargo box with a strap –
see page 238.
In Estates, the coupling ball bar is fastened
with a strap in a compartment in the spare
wheel well of the luggage compartment.
6
1)
Sales designation – see page 308.
236
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
Picture no: 17221t.tif
Fitting the coupling ball bar
Disengage and fold down the socket.
Remove the sealing plug from the hole for
the coupling ball bar and stow it in the
luggage compartment.
Picture no: 17222t.tif
Checking the tensioning of the coupling
ball bar
z Red marking on turn knob points
towards white marking on coupling
ball bar.
z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between
rotary knob and coupling ball bar.
z Key is in lock at position 1.
Picture no: 17223t.tif
Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be
tensioned before it is inserted into the
coupling housing:
z Unlock coupling ball bar (key to
position 1) – see Fig. 17222 T.
z Pull turn knob out and then turn it
clockwise as far as it will go – see
Fig. 17223 T.
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
237
Important
Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly
attached:
z Green marking on turn knob points
towards white marking on coupling ball
bar.
z No gap between turn knob and coupling
ball bar.
z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly
in coupling housing.
Picture no: 17224t.tif
Inserting the coupling ball bar
Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into
the coupling housing and push firmly
upwards until the coupling ball bar
engages in position.
The turn knob snaps back into its home
position resting against the coupling ball
bar.
9 Warning
Do not touch the turn knob when
inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of
injury.
Picture no: 17225t.tif
Lock coupling ball bar (key to position 2 –
see page 236, Fig. 17222 T). Remove key
and press protective flap into position.
When the coupling ball bar is locked the
turn knob can no longer be pulled out.
z Coupling ball bar must be locked and
key must be removed.
9 Warning
Towing a caravan / trailer is only
permitted with a properly attached
coupling ball bar. If the coupling ball bar
cannot be properly attached, consult a
workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Eye for break-away stopping cable
In the case of caravans / trailers with brake,
attach the break-away stopping cable to
the eye (arrow in Fig. 17225 T).
238
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the
coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket –
see page 236, Fig. 17221 T.
Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other
high-pressure cleaners to clean the
coupling ball bar.
Picture no: 17226t.tif
Dismounting the coupling ball bar
Unlock coupling ball bar (key to
position 1 – see page 236, Fig. 17222 T).
Pull out turn knob and then turn it clockwise
as far as it will go. Pull coupling ball bar
down out of the coupling housing and stow
in compartment in the luggage
compartment – see page 235.
Picture no: 17220t.tif
Stowage of coupling ball bar
Hatchback
Stow the coupling ball bar in the pouch
and fasten it in the luggage compartment
cargo box with the strap.
Estate
Stow the coupling ball bar in the
compartment in the spare wheel well
of the luggage compartment, fastening
it with the strap.
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
Caravan and trailer loads1)
The permissible caravan / trailer loads are
vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent
maximum values which must not be
exceeded. The actual caravan / trailer load
is the difference between the actual gross
weight of the caravan / trailer and the
actual coupling socket load with the
caravan / trailer coupled. When the
caravan / trailer load is being checked,
therefore, only the caravan / trailer wheels
– and not the jockey wheel – must be
standing on the weighing apparatus.
The permissible caravan / trailer loads for
your vehicle are given in the vehicle
documents. Unless otherwise stated, they
are valid for gradients up to max. 12 %.
1)
Observe national regulations.
The permissible caravan / trailer load
should be fully utilised only by drivers who
are adequately experienced in towing
large or heavy caravans / trailers.
The permitted caravan / trailer load
applies up to the specified incline and up to
an altitude of 1000 metres above sea-level.
Since engine power decreases as altitude
increases because of the air becoming
thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability,
the permitted towing weight also
decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres of
additional altitude. The towing weight
does not have to be reduced when driving
on roads with slight inclines (less than 8 %,
e.g. motorways).
239
The actual caravan / trailer load plus the
actual gross weight of the towing vehicle
must not exceed the maximum permitted
towing weight. For example, if the
permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised,
the caravan / trailer load must only be used
until the maximum permitted towing
weight is reached. The maximum
permitted towing weight is shown on
the identification plate - see page 306.
240
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
Coupling socket load
Rear axle load during towing
The coupling socket load is the load
exerted by the caravan / trailer on the
coupling ball. It can be varied by changing
the weight distribution when loading the
caravan / trailer.
With a trailer coupled and the towing
vehicle fully loaded (including all
occupants), the permissible rear axle
load (see identification plate or vehicle
documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
and the permissible Gross Vehicle Weight
by 45 kg for the Hatchback. For the Estate,
the permissible rear axle load may be
exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible
Gross Vehicle Weight by 30 kg. If the
permissible rear axle load is exceeded
a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)
applies (50 mph (80 km/h) if approved for
use as a commercial vehicle). If national
regulations specify a lower maximum
speed for vehicles towing a trailer, this
must be observed.
The maximum permissible coupling socket
load (75 kg) is specified on the towing
equipment identification plate and in the
vehicle documents. Always aim for the
maximum load, especially in the case of
heavy caravans / trailers. The coupling
socket load should never fall below 25 kg.
When measuring the coupling socket load,
make sure that the drawbar of the loaded
caravan / trailer is at the same height as it
will be when the caravan / trailer is coupled
with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly
important for caravans / trailers with
tandem axle.
Picture no: 17213t.tif
Tyre pressure
Increase the tyre pressure on the towing
vehicle to the value specified for a full
load – see page 326. Check the pressure
of the spare wheel and caravan / trailer
wheels.
Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA)
Trailer Stability Assist monitors vehicle
movements when towing a caravan or
trailer. If the system detects lurching
movements, engine power is reduced and
the vehicle / trailer combination is
selectively braked until the lurching ceases.
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
Parking distance sensors 3 are
deactivated when towing.
Handling is greatly influenced by the
loading of the caravan / trailer. Loads
should therefore be secured so that they
cannot slip and be placed in the centre of
the caravan / trailer if possible, i.e. above
the axle.
Picture no: 17227t.tif
Driving characteristics,
towing tips
In the case of caravans / trailers with
brakes, attach breakaway stopping cable
to eye.
Before attaching the caravan / trailer,
lubricate the ball of the caravan / trailer
towing device. However, do not lubricate
the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the
coupling ball, is being used to damp
snaking.
Check caravan / trailer lighting before
starting to drive. The fog tail light on the
vehicle is deactivated when towing a
caravan / trailer.
Trailers with LED turn signals must have a
provision enables light monitoring for
commercial bulbs.
Turn signal control indicator – see page 40.
In the case of trailers with low driving
stability or caravans with a permitted
gross vehicle weight of over 1300 kg
(Hatchback) / 1200 kg (Estate), do not
exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h); the
use of a friction-type stabiliser is highly
recommended.
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
if possible, even in countries where higher
speeds are permitted.
Make sure that you have enough room
when cornering and avoid sudden
manoeuvres.
241
If the caravan / trailer starts to sway, drive
more slowly, do not attempt to correct the
steering and brake sharply if necessary.
If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully,
depress the brake pedal as hard as
possible.
Remember that the braking distance for
vehicles towing caravans / trailers with and
without brake is always greater than that
for vehicles not towing a caravan / trailer.
6
242
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing
When driving downhill, the brakes are
under considerably more load when towing
a caravan / trailer. For this reason, drive in
the same gear as if driving uphill and drive
at a similar speed.
Before starting-off under extreme
conditions (high combination weight,
mountainous terrain with steep inclines),
switch off all unnecessary electrical loads
(e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning
system 3, heated front seats 3).
Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3
in automatic mode will automatically
select the driving programme with the
optimum engine braking effect.
Gear position 3, 2 or 1 can also be
manually selected if required.
The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
cooling power is therefore independent of
the engine speed.
Since a considerable amount of heat is
generated at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift down when
climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping
with the gradient in the higher gear.
Picture no: 17228t.tif
Starting on inclines
For vehicles with manual transmission,
the most favourable engine speed when
starting-off on an incline is between
2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines
and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel
engines. Hold engine speed constant,
engage clutch gradually (let slip), release
handbrake and open throttle. If possible,
the engine speed should not drop during
this procedure.
For vehicles with automatic transmission 3
or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode, apply
full throttle.
Self-help
Self-help
Starting the engine with jump leads 3
Towing the vehicle...............................
Towing service .....................................
Towing another vehicle.......................
Warning triangle ¨ 3.........................
First-aid kit (cushion) + 3...................
Stowing in the luggage compartment
Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............
Changing wheels .................................
Tyre repair kit 3 ...................................
Electrical system ..................................
Fuses and the most important
circuits they protect ..........................
Bulb replacement ................................
Halogen headlight system..................
Xenon headlight system 3,
Adaptive Forward Lighting
system 3 ............................................
Front indicator lights ...........................
Front fog lights 3.................................
Tail lights ..............................................
Number plate light ..............................
Courtesy lights .....................................
9 Warning
244
245
246
247
248
248
249
251
252
256
260
261
268
268
272
275
275
276
285
286
Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
passengers must be informed
accordingly.
Diesel fuel system, bleeding
Never let the tank run dry! If control
indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as
possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes.
It is possible to restart the engine if the tank
has been run dry. A delayed start is to be
expected. Switch on the ignition three times
for approx. 15 seconds. Then attempt to
start the engine for approx. 40 seconds1).
If the engine does not start, wait at
least 5 minutes and try again. If the engine
does not start, consult a workshop. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
1)
For engine Z 17 DTH: for technical reasons,
only possible for 30 seconds.
Sales designation – see page 309.
243
Starting
Do not start with quick charger
This prevents damage to electronic
components.
Do not start by pushing or towing
Because your vehicle is fitted with a
catalytic converter, it must not be started
by pushing or towing – see page 203.
Vehicle with the Open&Start system 3 must
not be started by pushing or towing if the
battery is discharged, since the steering
column lock cannot be released.
The vehicle can only be started using jump
leads – see following page.
244
Self-help
Starting the engine with jump
leads 3
z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage
(12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be
considerably less than that of the
discharged battery. Voltage and
capacity information can be found on
the batteries.
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be
started using jump leads and the battery of
another vehicle.
Attempts to start the vehicle should be
made at intervals of one minute and
should not last longer than 15 seconds.
z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
and a cross section of at least 16 mm2
(25 mm2 for diesel engines).
9 Warning
This must be done with extreme care. Any
deviation from the following instructions
could lead to personal injury or damage
resulting from battery explosion, as well
as to damage to the electrical systems in
both vehicles.
z Do not disconnect the discharged
battery from the vehicle.
Picture no: 17229t.tif
z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers.
z Never expose the battery to naked
flames or sparks.
z Do not lean over the battery during jump
starting.
z A discharged batter can freeze at
temperatures of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen
battery in a warm room before
connecting jump leads.
z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
touch those of the other lead.
z Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or
painted surfaces. The fluid contains
sulphuric acid which can cause injuries
and damage in the event of direct
contact.
z Wear eye protection and protective
clothing when handling a battery.
z Do not touch the vehicles while jump
starting.
z Apply handbrake. Manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic
transmission 3 in P.
Self-help
245
z Do not connect leads to negative
terminal of discharged battery!
z The connection point should be as far
away from the discharged battery as
possible.
z Route the leads so that they cannot
catch on rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
z Start the engine of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
Picture no: 17230t.tif
Connect the leads in the order shown in the
illustration:
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to
the positive terminal 1 of the battery
providing the jump start (identified by
"+" sign on battery case or terminal).
2. Connect the other end of this lead to the
positive terminal 2 of the discharged
battery ("+" sign).
3. Connect the first end of the other jump
lead to the negative terminal 3 of the
battery providing the start ("–" sign).
4. Connect the other end of the second
jump lead 4 to ground on the other
vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw
connection in the engine suspension.
z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
Attempts to start the vehicle should be
made at intervals of one minute and
should not last longer than 15 seconds.
z After starting, allow both engines to idle
for approx. 3 minutes with the leads
connected.
z In order to avoid excess voltage in the
electrical system, before removing a
lead, switch on an electrical consumer
(e.g. lights, heated rear window) in the
vehicle receiving the jump start.
z Reverse above sequence exactly when
removing leads.
Picture no: 17231t.tif
Towing the vehicle
To open the cover concealing the towing
eye socket at the front right of the vehicle:
disengage the cover at the bottom and pull
it off downwards.
The towing eye is found in the stowage
compartment for the jack 3 and vehicle 3
located under the spare wheel or in the
stowage compartment together with the
tyre repair kit 3 under the floor cover.
Jack and vehicle tools – see page 251.
Tyre repair kit 3 – see page 256.
6
246
Self-help
Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in
neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N.
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive
tractive force can damage the vehicle.
9 Warning
Significantly greater force is required for
braking: the brake servo unit is only
operational when the engine is running.
Picture no: 17232t.tif
Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far
as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
position.
Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a
tow rod 3 – to the eye.
Switch on ignition to release steering
column lock and to permit operation of
brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.
Vehicles with the Open&Start system 3
must not be towed when the battery is
discharged because the steering column
lock cannot be released. Towing is only
possible with the ignition switched on. Use
jump leads to start the engine if necessary.
Considerably greater steering force is
necessary since this unit is operative only
when the engine is running.
To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from
the towing vehicle, switch on the air
recirculation 3 and close the windows.
Vehicles with automatic transmission 3
should be towed facing forward only and
must not be towed faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km).
If the transmission is defective, or if the
above speed or distance is to be exceeded,
the front axle must be raised off the
ground.
Consult a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will
serve you best to get your vehicle back on
the road.
If the automatic clutch has been manually
released in vehicles with Easytronic 3
because of an interruption to the power
supply, towing is not permitted –
see page 180. In this case, consult a
workshop as soon as possible. We
recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise and refit the cover.
Towing service
Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
service of your choice and obtain an
estimate on towing costs before employing
any towing service. In this way you avoid
unnecessary costs and possible insurance
problems during claim processing.
Self-help
Picture no: 17233t.tif
Towing another vehicle
To open the cover concealing the towing
eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle:
disengage the cover at the bottom and pull
it off downwards.
Picture no: 18017t.tif
247
Picture no: 17234t.tif
On some model variants 3: remove the
cover concealing the towing eye at the rear
right of the vehicle by disengaging the tabs
at the bottom and pulling off the cover
from the top.
Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far
as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
position.
The towing eye is found in the stowage
compartment for the jack 3 and vehicle 3
located under the spare wheel or in the
stowage compartment together with the
tyre repair kit 3 under the floor cover.
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive
tractive force can damage the vehicle.
Jack and vehicle tools – see page 251.
Tyre repair kit 3 – see page 256.
Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a
tow rod 3 – to the eye.
After towing, unscrew the towing eye
clockwise and refit the cover.
Model variants with cover 3: install by
inserting the bottom lugs of the cover 3 in
the bumper, folding and then press the
lugs at the top into place.
248
Self-help
Picture no: 17235t.tif
Warning triangle ¨ 3
Hatchback, Astra TwinTop
Store warning triangle in rear luggage
compartment wall: first fit warning triangle
into recess on left and the insert in guide on
right.
To remove the warning triangle, lift to the
right and pull out to the right.
For vehicles with cargo box 3: lift the
warning triangle with the right half of the
cargo box. Pull out the warning triangle to
the right.
Picture no: 17236t.tif
Estate
Insert the warning triangle in the retaining
straps of the tailgate inner panelling.
Picture no: 17237t.tif
First-aid kit (cushion) + 3
Hatchback
Secure the first-aid kit to the right luggage
compartment wall using the retaining
strap.
Self-help
Picture no: 17238t.tif
Estate
Fasten the first-aid kit (cushion) to the left
luggage compartment wall with a
retaining strap.
Picture no: 17985t.tif
Astra TwinTop
Store the first-aid kit (cushion) in the recess
behind the strap in the left luggage
compartment wall.
Spare wheel 3
Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre
repair kit instead of a spare wheel see page 256.
249
Picture no: 17239t.tif
Stowing in the luggage compartment
The spare wheel is located in the luggage
compartment below the floor cover and is
fastened with a nut. On Estates, there is
also a spacer over the retaining nut.
Stowing standard size tyres in the spare
wheel well
The spare wheel well is not designed for all
sizes of commercially available tyres. If a
larger wheel must be stowed in the spare
wheel well after changing wheels, place the
floor cover on the overlaying wheel.
This must be observed when loading the
vehicle, especially for the Astra TwinTop.
250
Self-help
General information
Depending on model variant, the spare
wheel may take the form of a temporary
spare wheel 3. Refer to the notes on
pages 233, 255 and 326.
On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare
wheel may have a steel rim.
Picture no: 17240t.tif
Estate
Remove the adapters 3 and hooks 3 from
the rails 3 in the luggage compartment
walls. Raise the rear lashing eyes and lift
the floor cover to a vertical position so that
it is retained by the headliner.
When closing, guide the lashing eyes
through the slots in the floor cover.
Notes on temporary spare wheel 3
z Using a temporary spare wheel may
change the driving behaviour of the
vehicle, particularly if using winter
tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly
as possible, balance wheel and fit to
vehicle.
If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you
use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling
may be altered. Obtain a replacement for
the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and
have the wheel balanced and fitted to the
vehicle.
z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.
The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre
and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted
on the vehicle1): using the spare wheel may
alter vehicle handling. Have the defective
tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance
the wheel and have it mounted on the
vehicle.
z Replace temporary spare wheel with full
specification wheel without delay.
Vehicles with cargo box 3: removal –
see page 102.
z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
z Take curves slowly.
z Do not use the temporary spare wheel
for a lengthy period.
z Snow chains are not permitted on the
temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains are
necessary after a front wheel puncture,
fit the temporary spare wheel to the rear
and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre
pressure and adjust if necessary –
see page 327.
z Follow temporary spare wheel
instructions on pages 233, 255 and 326.
Astra TwinTop
Accessing the spare wheel when the roof is
open: engage luggage compartment cover
on the rear window frame and activate the
loading aid (see page 103). Raise the floor
cover in the luggage compartment.
1)
Country-specific version: the spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
Self-help
251
Notes on directional tyres 3
Directional tyres only provide maximum
performance when they are mounted in the
correct direction of rotation. If the tyres or
spare wheel must be mounted opposing
the specified direction of rotation (e.g.
after changing a flat tyre), observe the
following:
z Vehicle handling may change. Have the
defective tyre replaced as soon as
possible, and have the wheel balanced
and mounted on the vehicle.
z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
z Be especially careful when driving in rain
and snow.
Further information on directional tyres –
see page 226.
Picture no: 17241t.tif
Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools 3
The jack and the vehicle tools have been
specially developed for your vehicle and
must only be used on that vehicle. Only use
jack for changing wheels.
Vehicles with spare wheel 3: the jack and
vehicle tools are stowed in a compartment
in the luggage compartment beneath the
spare wheel. Remove the spare wheel see page 249.
Vehicles with tyre repair kit 3: the vehicle
tools are stowed together with the tyre
repair kit in a compartment beneath the
floor cover in the luggage compartment.
Picture no: 17242t.tif
After use, stow away the jack and tools in
the compartment as shown in illustration.
Astra TwinTop: the tools for emergency
operation of the convertible hardtop are
stowed in the glove compartment.
252
Self-help
Changing wheels
There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a
spare wheel – see page 256.
To ensure your safety, make the following
preparations and observe the following
information when changing wheels:
z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and nonskid surface.
z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply
handbrake, automatic transmission 3 –
selector lever in P, manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 – engage 1st or reverse
gear.
z Correctly set up the warning triangle.
Warning triangle – see page 248.
z Take the spare wheel from the luggage
compartment.
z Before raising the vehicle, set the front
wheels to the straight-ahead position.
z On the Astra TwinTop, the roof must be
closed before the vehicle is raised.
z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn
before raising the vehicle, but do not
totally unscrew the bolts.
z Never change more than one wheel at
once.
z No people or animals may be in the
vehicle when it is jacked up.
z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be changed by placing wedge
blocks or equivalent in front and behind
the wheel.
z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.
z Use the jack 3 only to change wheels.
z If the ground on which the vehicle is
standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm
thick) should be placed under the jack 3.
Using a thicker board could damage the
jack 3 and the vehicle.
z Do not start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on the jack.
z Fully tighten the wheel bolts after
lowering the vehicle all the way.
Self-help
Picture no: 17243t.tif
1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook
included with the vehicle tools 3.
For vehicle tools – see page 251.
For wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3:
the trim can remain on the wheel. Do not
remove the retaining washers 3 on the
wheel bolts.
Picture no: 17244t.tif
Alloy wheels 3: disengage the wheel bolt
caps with a screwdriver and remove.
Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth
between the screwdriver and ally wheel.
Picture no: 17245t.tif
253
2. Slacken wheel bolts using wheel bolt
wrench 3, putting on the wheel bolt
wrench as far as possible.
254
Self-help
Picture no: 17246t.tif
3. The location of each jacking point 3 is
indicated by a mark on the bottom edge
of the vehicle.
Picture no: 17247t.tif
4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the
necessary height by rotating the eye by
hand. Position the jack 3 at the front or
rear so that the jack claw spans the
vertical base and grips in the recess in
the vertical base. Make sure it is properly
positioned.
The jack base must be on the ground
directly below the jacking point in a
manner that prevents it from slipping.
Picture no: 17248t.tif
Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and
turn crank to raise vehicle.
If this is not the case, carefully lower the
vehicle immediately and reposition the
jack.
5. Unscrew wheel bolts and put somewhere
where the threads will not be soiled.
If the wheel bolts have retaining
washers 3, they must not be removed.
Self-help
10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the
wheel around the retaining clips. Valve
symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must
point towards valve on wheel.
Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt
caps 3.
Alloy wheels 3: align and refit wheel
bolt caps 3.
11. Stow replaced wheel, tools and warning
triangle in luggage compartment –
see pages 248 to 251.
Picture no: 17249t.tif
6. Change the wheel.
Notes on spare wheel – see page 249.
Notes on temporary spare wheel –
see page 250.
7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly,
inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
as possible.
8. Lower vehicle.
9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on
wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.
12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly
fitted wheel. Adjust as necessary.
255
13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts on the new wheel checked on the
vehicle using a torque wrench as soon
as possible and, if necessary, corrected.
Tightening torque – see page 326.
14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel
that was removed.
15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with
a full specification wheel without delay.
16. Initialise the Deflation Detection System
(DDS) 3 or tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 – see pages 217, 220.
256
Self-help
Tyre repair kit 3
Minor damage to the tyre tread or side
wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be
repaired using the tyre repair kit (does
not apply to run-flat tyres).
Do not remove the foreign body from the
tyre.
Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on
the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre
repair kit.
9 Warning
Driving with inadequate tyre pressure or
a flat tyre can lead to hidden tyre
damage, which cannot be eliminated by
using the tyre repair kit. Part the vehicle
and consult a workshop. We recommend
your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Important information – see page 259.
In the event of a flat tyre:
z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply
handbrake, automatic transmission 3 –
selector lever in P, manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 – engage 1st or reverse
gear.
z Correctly set up the warning triangle.
Warning triangle – see page 248.
Picture no: 17250t.tif
The tyre repair kit is in a compartment
under the floor cover luggage
compartment.
1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit
from the compartment. Carefully remove
the components from the pouch.
2. Remove the compressor.
Picture no: 17251t.tif
3. Remove the electrical connection cable
and air hose from the stowage
compartments on the underside of
the compressor.
Self-help
Picture no: 17252t.tif
4. Screw the compressor air hose to the
connection on the sealant bottle.
5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on
the compressor.
Set the compressor near the tyre in such
a way that the sealant bottle is upright.
6. Remove the valve cap from the defective
tyre.
Picture no: 17253t.tif
7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.
8. The switch on the compressor must be
set to §.
9. Connect the compressor plug to the
accessory socket or cigarette lighter
socket. Accessory socket – see page 106.
257
Picture no: 17254t.tif
10. Set the rocker switch on the
compressor to I. The tyre is filled with
sealant.
11. While the sealant bottle drains (approx.
30 seconds) the pressure indicator on
the compressor briefly points to 6 bar.
Pressure then sinks again.
12. All of the sealant is pumped into the
tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with
air.
13. The prescribed tyre pressure
(see page 326) should be reached
within 10 minutes. Switch off the
compressor when the correct pressure is
obtained.
258
Self-help
Drain excess tyre pressure with the
button over the pressure indicator.
Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes – see "Important
information" on page 259.
14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the
filler hose to the free connection on the
sealant bottle. This prevents sealant
leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the
luggage compartment.
15. Wipe away any sealant spill with a
cloth.
Picture no: 17255t.tif
If the prescribed tyre pressure is not
reached within 10 minutes, detach the
tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle one tyre
revolution (approx. 2 metres) in or
against the flow of traffic. Reconnect
the tyre repair kit and continue the
filling procedure for 10 minutes. If the
prescribed tyre pressure is still not
reached, the tyre is too badly
damaged. Park the vehicle and consult
a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
16. Dismantle the warning triangle and
stow it in the luggage compartment –
see page 248.
17. The enclosed sticker shows the
maximum permitted speed at which the
tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in
the driver’s field of vision.
18. Continue driving immediately to allow
the sealant to distribute evenly
throughout the tyre. Stop after approx.
6 miles (10 km) but no more than 10
minutes, and check tyre pressure. Screw
the compressor air hose directly onto
the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).
Picture no: 17256t.tif
If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar
(19 psi), adjust to the prescribed value.
Repeat the procedure until there is no
more pressure loss.
If tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 psi),
the vehicle must not be driven. Consult
a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
19. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage
compartment – see page 256.
Self-help
Important
9 Warning
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Do not use the temporary spare wheel for
a lengthy period.
Steerability and driving behaviour may
be impaired.
The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is
severely affected, therefore have this tyre
replaced.
If the compressor makes abnormal noises
or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least
30 minutes.
The integrated safety valve opens at a
pressure of 7 bar (102 psi).
Protect the compressor from moisture and
rain.
The sealant can only be stored for
approx. 4 years. After this time, the sealing
properties can no longer be guaranteed.
Heed the expiration date on the sealant
bottle.
The sealant bottle can only be used once.
Replace a used sealant bottle.
The compressor and sealant can be used
from approx. -30 °C.
Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in
accordance with applicable legislation.
An adapter for filling air mattresses, inner
tubes, etc. is located on the underside of
the compressor. Remove by unscrewing the
compressor air hose and pulling out the
adapter.
259
260
Self-help
Picture no: 17257t.tif
Electrical system
9 Warning
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Fuses
The vehicle has two fuseboxes: one behind
a cover on the left side of the luggage
compartment and one in the front left of
the engine compartment.
It is advisable to carry a complete set of
fuses – available from any Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. Store spare fuses in
the luggage compartment fusebox –
see illustration above. Opening the cover –
see following pages.
Picture no: 17258t.tif
Before replacing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch and the ignition.
A blown fuse (see illustrations to the right)
can be recognised by its melted wire. Do
not install a new fuse until the cause of the
fault has been remedied.
There is a fuse extractor in the luggage
compartment fusebox to facilitate
replacement of small fuses – see illustration
above for an example.
Only fit fuses of the specified current
rating. Each fuse has its current rating
written on it, in addition the ratings are
colour coded.
Picture no: 17259t.tif
Different versions of fuses are used.
Fuse,
colour
Light brown
Dark brown
Red
Light blue
Yellow
White
Light green
Fuse,
rating
5A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
20 A
25 A
30 A
Self-help
Picture no: 17260t.tif
Fuse,
colour
Light blue
White
Pink (maxi-fuse)
Dark green
(maxi-fuse)
Fuse,
rating
20 A
25 A
30 A
40 A
Picture no: 17261t.tif
261
Picture no: 18022t.tif
Fuses and the most important
circuits they protect
3-door Hatchback
To open, fold the cover upwards.
Fusebox in luggage compartment
Depending on the equipment version,
there are two different fuseboxes for
differing electrical circuits.
z Version A – see Fig. 17949 T
z Version B – see Fig. 17958 T
Astra TwinTop
To open, pull the two knobs, remove the
clips and fold the cover upwards.
Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 260.
The fusebox is located on the left side of
the luggage compartment behind a cover.
Do not store any objects behind the cover.
5-door Hatchback and Estate
To open, use a coin to turn the two latches
as illustrated and fold the cover
downwards.
262
Self-help
Fusebox, version B
Some functions are protected by several
fuses.
Picture no: 17949t.tif
Fusebox, version A
Some functions are protected by several
fuses. To replace a fuse, pull off its
protective cap.
No. Circuit
1 Luggage compartment
socket
2 Rear socket
3 Electric
windows, front
4 Electric
windows, rear
5 Heated exterior mirrors
6 Air conditioning system
Rating
15 A
15 A
30 A
No. Circuit
1 Electric
windows, front
2 –
3 Instruments
4 Heating,
air conditioning system,
Electronic Climate Control
(ECC) 3
5 Airbags
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
10 –
11 Heated rear window
12 Tailgate wiper
Rating
25 A
–
7.5 A
5A
7.5 A
–
–
–
–
–
25 A
15 A
No. Circuit
13 Parking distance sensors
14 Heating,
air conditioning system
15 –
16 Seat occupancy recognition,
Open&Start system
17 Rain sensor,
air quality sensor,
tyre pressure monitoring
system,
interior mirror
18 Instruments, switches
19 –
20 CDC
21 Heated exterior mirrors1)
22 Sunroof
23 Electric
windows, rear
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
1)
Not in conjunction with
Vauxhall alarm system 3.
Rating
5A
7.5
–
5A
5A
5A
–
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
25 A
Self-help
No. Circuit
38 Central locking system,
clamp 30
39 Seat heater (left)
40 Seat heater (right)
41 –
42 –
43 –
44 –
No.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Picture no: 17958t.tif
Circuit
Diagnostics plug
–
Electrically retractable
exterior mirrors
Ultrasonic sensor,
Vauxhall alarm system
–
Cigarette lighter,
front socket
Rear socket
–
Rating
7.5 A
–
7.5 A
5A
–
15 A
15 A
–
No.
32
33
34
35
36
37
Picture no:
Circuit
–
Open&Start system
Sunroof, TwinTop
Rear socket
Towing equipment
Courtesy light
Rating
–
15 A
25 A
15 A
20 A
5A
263
Rating
25 A
15 A
15 A
–
–
–
–
264
Self-help
Depending on the equipment version,
there are two different fuse layouts for the
engine compartment fusebox, handling
different electrical circuits:
z If the luggage compartment fusebox is
version A – see Fig. 17949 T on
page 262 – the fuse layout in the engine
compartment is version A - see next
column.
Picture no: 17263t.tif
Fusebox in engine compartment
The fusebox is at the front left side of the
engine compartment.
Fuse layout, version A
Some functions are protected by several
fuses.
No.
1
2
3
Circuit
ABS
ABS
Interior fan
climate control system
4 Interior fan,
heating,
air conditioning system
5 Radiator fan 11)
z If the luggage compartment fusebox
is version B – see Fig. 17958 T on
page 263 – the fuse layout in the
engine compartment is version B –
see next page.
Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Rating
20 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 260.
9 Warning
Turn off engine before opening engine
compartment fusebox; risk of injury –
see page 291.
To open the cover, release the catch by
inserting a screwdriver into the opening as
far as it will go and swivelling it to the side.
Open the cover upwards and remove.
1)
Different ratings depending on engine
and equipment level.
Self-help
No.
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Picture no: 17264t.tif
No. Circuit
6 Radiator fan 21)
7 Central locking system
8 Windscreen wash system,
tailgate
9 Heated rear window,
heated exterior mirrors
10 Diagnostics plug
11 Instruments
12 Mobile telephone,
digital radio,
Twin Audio,
display
13 Courtesy light
1)
Rating
20 A
30 A
40 A
20 A
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
5A
Different ratings depending on engine
and equipment level.
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Picture no:
Circuit
Windscreen wiper
Windscreen wiper
Horn,
ABS,
brake light switch,
air conditioning system
Diesel filter
or
air conditioning system
Starter
Transmission electronics
Horn
Rating
30 A
30 A
5A
28
29
30
31
32
33
25 A
20 A
25 A
30 A
15 A
34
35
36
Circuit
Engine electronics
Engine electronics
Headlight range adjustment
Fuel pump
Reversing lights
Engine electronics
Heating,
air conditioning system,
air quality sensor
–
Power steering
Engine electronics
Tailgate wiper
Brake light switch
Headlight range
adjustment,
light switch,
clutch switch,
instrument assembly,
driver’s door module
Control unit
steering column module
Infotainment system
Cigarette lighter,
front socket
265
Rating
20 A
7.5 A
5A
15 A
5A
10 A
7.5 A
–
5A
10 A
15 A
5A
5A
7.5 A
20 A
15 A
266
Self-help
Fuse layout, version B
Some functions are protected by several
fuses.
No.
1
2
3
Circuit
ABS
ABS
Interior fan
climate control system
4 Interior fan,
heating,
air conditioning system
5 Radiator fan 11)
6 Radiator fan 21)
1)
Rating
20 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
Different ratings depending on engine
and equipment level.
No.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Circuit
Windscreen wash system
Horn
Headlight wash system
–
–
–
Front fog lights
Windscreen wiper
Windscreen wiper
Rating
10 A
15 A
25 A
–
–
–
15 A
30 A
30 A
No. Circuit
16 Electronics control units,
Open&Start system,
ABS,
brake light switch,
TwinTop
17 Diesel filter heating
18 Starter
19 Transmission electronics
20 Air conditioning system
21 Engine electronics
22 Engine electronics
23 Adaptive Forward Lighting,
headlight range adjustment
Rating
5A
25 A
25 A
30 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
Self-help
No.
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Picture no: 17264t.tif
Circuit
Fuel pump
Transmission electronics
Engine electronics
Power steering
Transmission electronics
Transmission electronics
Engine electronics
Rating
15 A
15 A
10 A
5A
5A
7.5 A
10 A
Picture no:
No. Circuit
31 Adaptive Forward Lighting,
headlight range adjustment
32 Brake system,
air conditioning system,
clutch switch
33 Adaptive Forward Lighting,
headlight range adjustment,
light switch
34 Control unit,
steering column module
35 Infotainment system
36 Mobile telephone,
digital radio,
Twin Audio,
display
Rating
10 A
5A
5A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
267
268
Self-help
Bulb replacement
Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off
and switch relevant switch off.
Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch
the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass evaporate.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadvertently stained bulbs may be
cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
Replacement bulb must be in accordance
with data on base of defective bulb. Do not
exceed wattage given on bulb base.
Picture no: 17265t.tif
The bulbs of the front external lights are
replaced through openings in the front
wheel arch: turn relevant wheels to gain
access, release catch and remove cover.
Headlight aiming
We recommend that headlight aiming be
carried out by your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will have special equipment.
When adjusting headlights, headlight
range adjustment must be set to 0.
Picture no: 17266t.tif
Halogen headlight system
Headlights with separate systems for main
beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2
(outer bulbs).
Self-help
Picture no: 17267t.tif
Dipped beam
1. Replace bulb through opening the front
wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain
access, release catch and remove
cover – see page 268.
2. Remove headlight protective cover.
Picture no: 17268t.tif
3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage.
Picture no: 17269t.tif
269
4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from
the reflector.
270
Self-help
Picture no: 17270t.tif
Picture no: 17271t.tif
5. Detach bulb from bulb holder.
Main beam
6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder,
without touching the glass.
1. Open bonnet.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
the bulb holder engage in the recesses
in the reflector.
8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as
it will go.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
2. Replace bulbs from engine
compartment out.
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, remove the air hose from the air
filter.
To replace the bulb on the left-hand
side, remove the plug from the fusebox.
3. Remove headlight protective cover.
4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
Picture no: 17272t.tif
5. Disengage spring clip from retainer by
pressing forward and then swing
downward.
6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the
lugs in the recesses on the reflector
without touching the glass.
Self-help
271
8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector
onto bulb.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
After bulb replacement on the righthand side, reattach air hose to air filter
and engage.
After bulb replacement on the lefthand side, reconnect the fusebox plug
and engage.
Picture no: 17271t.tif
Parking lights
1. Open bonnet.
2. Replace bulbs from engine compartment
out.
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, remove the air hose from the air
filter.
To replace the bulb on the left-hand
side, remove the plug from the fusebox.
3. Remove main beam headlight protective
cover.
Picture no: 17273t.tif
4. Remove parking light socket from
reflector.
6
272
Self-help
Picture no: 17274t.tif
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight
protective cap in position and close.
After bulb replacement on the righthand side, reattach air hose to air filter
and engage.
After bulb replacement on the left-hand
side, reconnect the fusebox plug and
engage.
Picture no: 17275t.tif
Xenon headlight system 3,
Adaptive Forward Lighting
system 3
Headlights with separate systems for
dipped beam 1 (inner bulbs) and main
beam 2 (outer bulbs).
Dipped beam
9 Warning
The dipped beam operates at very high
voltage. Do not touch; high voltage
can be fatal. Have bulbs changed by
a workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Picture no: 17276t.tif
Main beam
1. Replace bulb through opening the front
wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain
access, release catch and remove
cover – see page 268.
2. Remove headlight protective cover.
Self-help
Picture no: 17277t.tif
3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage.
Picture no: 17278t.tif
4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from
the reflector.
273
Picture no: 17270t.tif
5. Detach bulb from bulb holder.
6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder,
without touching the glass.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
the bulb holder engage in the recesses
in the reflector.
8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it
will go.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
274
Self-help
Picture no: 17276t.tif
Parking lights
1. Open bonnet.
2. Replace bulb through opening the front
wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain
access, release catch and remove
cover – see page 268.
3. Remove main beam headlight protective
cover.
Picture no: 17279t.tif
4. Remove parking light socket from
reflector.
Picture no: 17280t.tif
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight
protective cap in position and close.
8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
Self-help
275
6. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate
clockwise and engage in position.
7. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
Front fog lights 3
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Picture no: 17281t.tif
Front indicator lights
1. Open bonnet.
2. Replace bulb through opening the front
wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain
access, release catch and remove
cover – see page 268.
3. Rotate bulb holder to left and
disengage.
Picture no: 17282t.tif
4. Push bulb into socket slightly, rotate left
and remove.
5. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
276
Self-help
Picture no: 17283t.tif
Picture no: 17284t.tif
Tail lights
2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder.
Hatchback 5-door
1. To replace bulbs on the right side, use a
coin to open the lock as indicated in the
illustration and fold the cover down.
3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen
fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt
wrench 3 – see vehicle tools on
page 251.
To replace bulbs on the left side, use a
coin to turn both locks as illustrated on
page 261 in Fig. 17261 T and fold the
cover down.
Picture no: 17285t.tif
4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear.
Self-help
277
6. Remove bulb from socket.
7. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages. Insert
three screws with washers and tighten as
far as possible.
Picture no: 17286t.tif
5. Unscrew three screws using a screwdriver
(vehicle tools – see page 251). Press
locking tabs on outside of bulb holder
inward and remove the bulb holder.
Picture no: 17287t.tif
Bulbs in bulb holder:
1 = Reversing light
2 = Turn signal
3 = Tail light / brake light
4 = Tail light
5 = Fog tail light
278
Self-help
11. Carry out the following steps to ensure
proper function of the tail lights:
– switch on ignition,
– operate brake,
– switch on parking lights.
Picture no: 17288t.tif
9. Ensure that the bulb holder seal is
positioned as illustrated.
Picture no: 17289t.tif
10. Insert the bulb housing in the body,
engaging the lug and the ball pin in the
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the
plug connector. Close and engage the
flap.
Self-help
Picture no: 17290t.tif
Hatchback 3-door
1. To replace bulbs, fold the cover down.
Picture no: 17284t.tif
2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder.
3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen
fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt
wrench 3 – see vehicle tools on
page 251.
Picture no: 17285t.tif
279
4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear.
280
Self-help
6. Remove bulb from socket.
7. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages.
Picture no: 17291t.tif
5. Remove the round seal from the
fastening bolt. Press the locking tabs on
the outside of the bulb holder outward
and remove the bulb holder.
Picture no: 17287t.tif
Bulbs in bulb holder:
1 = Reversing light
2 = Turn signal
3 = Tail light / brake light
4 = Tail light
5 = Fog tail light
Self-help
281
11. Carry out the following steps to ensure
proper function of the tail lights:
– switch on ignition,
– operate brake,
– switch on parking lights.
Picture no: 17292t.tif
9. Ensure that the bulb holder seal is
positioned as illustrated. Fit the round
seal on the fastening bolt.
Picture no: 17289t.tif
10. Insert the bulb housing in the body,
engaging the lug and the ball pin in the
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the
plug connector. Close and engage the
flap.
282
Self-help
Picture no: 17293t.tif
Estate
1. Disengage cover by pressing retaining
lugs and remove.
Picture no: 17294t.tif
2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder.
3. Hold the outside of the bulb housing,
unscrew the three fastening nuts and
remove the bulb housing rearwards.
Picture no: 17295t.tif
4. Unscrew the three screws with a
screwdriver (vehicle tools – see
page 251) and remove the bulb holder.
Self-help
283
6. Insert new bulb without touching the
glass. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing
and screw in place. Insert bulb housing
into body and tighten fastening nuts by
hand. Attach plug connector. Close and
lock cover.
7. Carry out the following steps to ensure
proper function of the tail lights:
– switch on ignition,
– operate brake,
– switch on parking lights.
Picture no: 17296t.tif
Bulbs in bulb holder:
1 = Tail light / brake light
2 = Turn signal
3 = Reversing light
4 = Fog tail light
5. Remove bulb from socket.
Picture no: 17986t.tif
Astra TwinTop
1. Unscrew retaining nuts.
6
284
Self-help
Picture no: 17987t.tif
2. Remove bulb housing from outside.
Disengage plug by pressing on flap
and remove from bulb holder.
3. Detach seal from bulb holder.
Picture no: 17988t.tif
4. Disengage sockets by turning and
remove.
Press locking tabs on the long sides of
the bulb holder outwards; lift bulb holder
at front end (arrow) and remove.
Picture no: 17989t.tif
Bulbs in bulb holder:
1 = Tail light / brake light
2 = Tail light
3 = Fog tail light
4 = Reversing light
5 = Turn signal
Self-help
285
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing by
first inserting the lug in the front of
the plug. Fold together bulb holder,
ensuring that it engages properly.
Insert sockets and engage by turning.
Picture no: 18018t.tif
8. Fit seal on bulb holder as illustrated.
Ensure that the seal is flat in the area
of the screws.
9. Engage plug. Insert light housing in
body, ensuring proper positioning of
the ball pins in the recesses. Tighten
the retaining nuts.
10. Carry out the following steps to ensure
proper function of the tail lights:
– switch on ignition,
– operate brake,
– switch on parking lights.
Picture no: 17297t.tif
Number plate light
1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert
as illustrated above. Press to the side
and release spring.
286
Self-help
Picture no: 17298t.tif
Picture no: 17299t.tif
2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking
care not to pull on the cable.
4. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwise and
disengage.
3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb
socket.
5. Remove bulb from socket.
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert socket in bulb housing and rotate
clockwise to engage.
8. Connect plug to bulb socket.
9. Insert and engage bulb housing.
Picture no: 17300t.tif
Courtesy lights
Front courtesy light, reading lights 3
To ensure that no power is supplied to the
lights, close the doors before removing.
1. Disengage lens by hand at location
illustrated above, press it downward
slightly and remove at a downward
angle.
2. Remove bulb from socket.
3. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
4. Mount lens and engage in position.
Self-help
287
Rear courtesy lights 3,
rear reading lights 3
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
Picture no: 17301t.tif
Glove compartment lighting,
luggage compartment lighting,
footwell lighting 3
To ensure that no power is supplied to the
lights, close the doors or hold the contact
switch depressed before removing.
1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver.
Picture no: 17302t.tif
2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip
and remove.
3. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
4. Insert light in opening and engage in
position.
Instrument illumination,
Information display illumination 3
Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
288
If you have a problem
If you have a problem
The majority of areas of concern can be
quickly resolved in this way.
Should you wish to pursue the matter
further, the Principal of the Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer should be made
aware of your concern. It is advisable in
cases such as this to write to him to confirm
your problem and the solutions that have
been offered.
In our experience the most common cause
of all complaints is the result of
misunderstanding or lack of
communication between the customer and
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
We sincerely hope you will never have
cause to complain about your vehicle.
However, if things do go wrong, the best
course of action for you to take is to
contact your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and
explain the difficulty you are having. We
are confident they will do their utmost to
resolve the problem to your complete
satisfaction.
Sometimes, however, despite the best of
intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your
problem has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, please make an appointment
to discuss the matter with the Manager of
the department concerned.
They will review all the facts involved. Then
if it is felt some further action can be taken,
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be
advised accordingly. In any case, your
contact will be acknowledged confirming
Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter.
If you are not satisfied with the outcome,
you can if you wish, seek advice from an
independent third party such as:
You can be assured the Authorised
Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious
to fully investigate your problems and
correct any errors made. After all, he has a
large investment in his business and is
proud of his reputation and
professionalism and fully realises that
satisfied customers are his key to success.
Automobile Association (A.A.)
Fanum House,
BASINGSTOKE,
Hants., RG21 2EA
In the unlikely event that you are still not
happy with the answer your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer has given, or the
action he proposes to correct the problem,
you may contact the Customer Care
Department1) where a team of Customer
Care Consultants will spare no effort to
ensure your complete satisfaction.
The Customer Relations Department,
Society of Motor Manufacturers and
Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.),
Forbes House, Halkin Street,
LONDON, SW1X 7DS
Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
Customer Care,
Griffin House,
Osborne Road,
LUTON,
Beds., LU1 3YT
Telephone: 01582 427200
1)
Calls may be monitored and recorded for
training purposes.
Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.),
R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd.,
89-91 Pall Mall,
LONDON, SW1Y S45
Customer Complaints Service,
Scottish Motor Trade Association,
(S.M.T.A.),
3 Palmerston Place,
EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ
The National Conciliation Service,
Retail Motor Industry Federation,
9 North Street,
RUGBY, CV21 2AB
If you have a problem whilst abroad:
The Service Departments of Adam Opel AG
and General Motors branches everywhere
will provide information and assistance:
If you have a problem
Opel Austria Vertriebs GmbH
Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59
1220 Vienna – Austria
Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or
00 43-1-2 88 77 0
ADAM OPEL AG
Bahnhofsplatz 1
65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany
Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or
00 49-61 42-7 70
Opel Belgium N.V.
Prins Boudewijnlaan 30
2550 Kontich – Belgium
Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 11
General Motors Hellas S.A.
56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str.
Amarousion
151 25 Athens – Greece
Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01
Opel C & S spol. s.r.o.
Na Pankráci 26
140 00 Prague 4 – Czech Republic
Tel. 00 420-2-61 21-88 21
General Motors Danmark
Jaegersborg Alle 4
2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark
Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00
Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
Customer Care
Griffin House, Osborne Road
Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England
Tel. 00 44-15 82-42 72 00
General Motors Finland Oy
Pajuniityntie 5
00320 Helsinki – Finland
Tel. Helsinki 00 358-61 58 81
General Motors France
1 – 9, avenue du Marais
Angle Quai de Bezons
95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France
Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 00
Opel Southeast Europe Ltd.
Szabadsag utca 117
2040 Budaörs – Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
General Motors India
Sixth Floor, Tower A
Global Business Park
Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road
Gurgaon 122 022, Haryana – India
Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333
Opel Ireland Ltd.
Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road
Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland
Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00
General Motors Italia Srl
Piazzale dell’Industria 40
00144 Rome – Italy
Tel. 00 39-6-5 46 51
Opel Nederland B.V.
Lage Mosten 49 – 63
4822 NK Breda – Netherlands
Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 88 00
289
General Motors Norge AS
Kjeller-Vest 6
2027 Kjeller – Norway
Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04
General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Domaniewska 41
06-672 Warsaw – Poland
Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00
General Motors Portugal
Quinta da Fonte
Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2
2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal
Tel. 00 351-21 440 75 00
General Motors España S.L.
Paseo de la Castellana, 91
28046 Madrid – Spain
Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25
Saab Opel Sverige AB
Esbogatan 8
164 74 Kista – Sweden
Tel. 00 46-8-632 85 00
General Motors Suisse S.A.
Stelzenstraße 4
8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland
Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80
Opel Türkiye Ltd. Sti.
Kemalpasa yolu üzeri
35861 Torbali/Izmir – Turkey
Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53
In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Croatia, Macedonia,
Romania, Slovenia and Yugoslavia
please contact the Opel
Service Department in Budaörs – Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
290
Maintenance, inspection system
Maintenance,
inspection system
The service interval display takes account
of off-the-road periods during which the
battery is disconnected.
For vehicles with flexible oil change and
service intervals, the length of these
intervals is based on several parameters
stemming from usage. For this reason,
various engine-specific data is continually
gathered and is used to calculate the
remaining distance until the next service.
Picture no: 17008t.tif
A note on safety ..................................
Checking and topping up fluids .........
Engine oil ..............................................
Diesel fuel filter ....................................
Coolant .................................................
Brake fluid ............................................
Windscreen wiper ................................
Windscreen and headlight
wash systems 3.................................
Battery ..................................................
Protecting electronic components .....
Vehicle decommissioning....................
Vehicle recommissioning.....................
291
291
292
294
294
296
297
299
300
300
301
301
In order to guarantee economical and
safe vehicle operation and to maintain
the value of your vehicle, it is of vital
importance that all maintenance work
is carried out at the proper intervals as
specified by Vauxhall.
In vehicles with a fixed oil change and
service interval, InSP appears in the
odometer display when the ignition is
switched on if the vehicle is due for service.
Have service work performed within a
week or 300 miles (500 km). We
recommend that you contact your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
This remaining distance can be displayed
with the ignition off: briefly press the trip
odometer reset button, the mileage
reading shows. Press the button again for
around 2 seconds, InSP and the remaining
distance is shown.
If the remaining distance is less than
1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed
with a remaining distance of 600 miles
(1000 km) when the ignition is switched on
and off. InSP is displayed for several
seconds if the remaining distance is less
than 600 miles (1000 km). Have the service
work that is due carried out within one
week or 300 miles (500 km). Have this work
carried out by a repairer, in accordance
with Vauxhall Motors' recommendations,
using Genuine Vauxhall Parts and
Accessories, in order to avoid invalidation
of warranty claims.
Maintenance, inspection system
291
Further information on maintenance and
the Service Plan can be found in the Service
Booklet, which is in the glove compartment.
Have maintenance work, as well as repairs
to the bodywork and equipment, carried
out by a professional. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is
familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in
possession of the necessary special tools
and the latest Service Instructions from
Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use
a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the
warranty period to avoid invalidation of
warranty claims. See the Service Booklet for
further information.
Separate anti-corrosion service
Have this carried out every 2 years, either
within the scope of a Service or separately,
see Service Booklet. We recommend that
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer in order to avoid loss of warranty
claims for rust damage.
Picture no: 17304t.tif
A note on safety
To avoid injury from moving parts and
cables conducting ignition voltage, only
carry out engine compartment
checks (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine
oil level) when the ignition is switched off.
9 Warning
The cooling fan is controlled by a
thermoswitch and can therefore start
unexpectedly even if the ignition is
switched off. Risk of injury.
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Picture no: 17305t.tif
Never carry out any repairs or adjustment
and maintenance work on the vehicle
yourself. This especially applies to the
engine, chassis and safety parts. You may
unwittingly infringe the provisions of the
law and, by not performing the work
properly, endanger yourself and other
road users.
Checking and topping up fluids
To aid identification, the caps used when
topping up engine oil, coolant and wash
fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured
yellow.
292
Maintenance, inspection system
Picture no: 17306t.tif
Engine oil
Information on engine oils is found in the
Service Booklet.
Engine oil level and consumption
Every engine consumes engine oil for
technical reasons. The engine oil
consumption cannot be assessed until a
fairly long distance has been driven, and
may be above the specified value when
the vehicle is first being driven (run-in
period). Frequent driving at high revs
increases engine oil consumption.
Picture no: 17307t.tif
The engine oil level is checked
automatically1) – see page 39. Before
embarking on a long journey it is advisable
to check the engine oil level.
Picture no: 17308t.tif
Checking the engine oil level,
topping up engine oil
The illustrations on this page indicate
checks on one petrol and two diesel
engines.
The oil level must be checked with the
vehicle on a level surface and with the
engine (which must be at operating
temperature) switched off. Wait at least
5 minutes before checking the level to
allow the normal engine oil accumulation
in the engine to drain into the oil pan.
9 Warning
9 Warning
Do not allow the engine oil level to drop
below the minimum level!
It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain
the correct level of an appropriate quality
oil in the engine.
1)
Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine.
Sales designation – see page 308.
Maintenance, inspection system
Picture no: 17309t.tif
Picture no: 17310t.tif
To check the engine oil level, insert wiped
oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go.
Top engine oil up if the level has dropped
into the range of the top-up mark MIN.
Top up with the same brand of engine oil
that was used during the previous oil
change, following the instructions in the
Service Booklet.
The engine oil level must not exceed the
upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess
engine oil must be drained off or extracted.
If the engine oil level is above the MAX
mark there is a risk of damage to the
engine or the catalytic converter.
To close, position the cap and screw it
into place.
Capacity between MIN and MAX marks –
see pages 336, 337.
Capacities – see pages 336, 337.
293
Picture no: 17311t.tif
Oil change, oil filter change
Change the oil at the displayed service
intervals.
We recommend that you use genuine
Vauxhall oil filters.
9 Warning
We recommend that you entrust engine
oil and filter changes to a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with
legal requirements regarding disposal of
used oil and oil filters and can thus help
to protect both the environment and your
health.
294
Maintenance, inspection system
Diesel fuel filter
Coolant
Check fuel filter for any water residue when
each engine oil change takes place. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
During operation the system is pressurised.
The temperature may therefore rise briefly
to over 100 °C.
Illumination of A indicates water in the
fuel filter 3.
Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals
if the vehicle is subjected to extreme
operating conditions such as high humidity
(primarily in coastal areas), extremely high
or low outside temperatures and
substantially varying daytime and nighttime temperatures.
The glycol-based coolant provides
excellent corrosion protection for the
heating and cooling systems as well as
anti-freeze protection down to –28 °C. It
remains in the cooling system throughout
the year and need not be changed.
Use of certain anti-freezes can lead to
engine damage. We therefore recommend
that you use anti-freezes that have been
approved by Vauxhall.
9 Warning
Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must
therefore be kept in the original container
and out of the reach of children.
Picture no: 17312t.tif
Anti-freeze and corrosion protection
Before the start of the cold weather season,
have the coolant checked for correct
concentration. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
The amount of anti-freeze must provide
protection up to approx. –28 °C. If the antifreeze concentration is too low, this
reduces protection from freezing and
corrosion. Top up anti-freeze if necessary.
If coolant loss is topped up with water,
have concentration checked and add antifreeze if necessary.
Maintenance, inspection system
9 Warning
Allow engine to cool down before
removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler
cap carefully so that pressure can escape
slowly, otherwise there is a risk of
scalding.
Top up anti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is
available, top up with clean tap water.
If tap water is unavailable, distilled water
can be used.
Picture no: 17313t.tif
Coolant level
Hardly any losses occur since the cooling
system is sealed and it is thus rarely
necessary to top up the coolant.
The coolant in the compensation tank
should be slightly above the mark
KALT / COLD with the cooling system cold.
It rises when the engine is warm and falls
again as it cools. If it drops below the
marking in this case, it should be topped up
to a level just above the marking.
After topping up with drinking water or
distilled water, check the anti-freeze
level and add anti-freeze if required.
Eliminate the cause of the coolant loss.
We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
To close, position the cap and screw it into
place.
295
Coolant temperature
Control indicator W illuminates when
coolant temperature is too high. Check
coolant level immediately:
z Coolant level low:
Top up coolant. Pay attention to the
instructions given under "Anti-freeze
and corrosion protection" and "Coolant
level". Have the cause of coolant loss
remedied. We recommend that you
consult your Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer.
z Coolant level OK:
Have the cause of increased coolant
temperature remedied. Consult a
workshop. We recommend your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
296
Maintenance, inspection system
Use of certain brake fluids can lead to
damage or reduced braking effect. We
therefore recommend that you use only
high performance brake fluid approved by
Vauxhall.
When topping up, ensure maximum
cleanliness as contamination of the brake
fluid can lead to function problems in the
braking system.
Picture no: 17314t.tif
Brake fluid
Brake fluid level
9 Warning
Caution – brake fluid is poisonous and
corrosive. Do not allow it to come into
contact with eyes, skin, fabric or painted
surfaces. Direct contact could cause
injury and damage.
The fluid level in the reservoir must be
neither higher than the MAX mark nor
lower than the MIN mark.
After correcting the brake fluid level, have
the cause of brake fluid loss remedied. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
Brake fluid change
Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs
water. If the brakes become hot, such as
when driving on long downhill stretches,
vapour bubbles can occur in the water,
which can have an extremely adverse
effect on braking power (depending on the
proportion of water).
The fluid change intervals specified in the
Service Booklet must therefore be
observed.
9 Warning
We recommend that you have brake fluid
changed by a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will be familiar with the
requirements of the law as regards
disposal of brake fluid and can thus help
to protect the environment and your
health.
Maintenance, inspection system
Windscreen wiper
Clear vision is essential for safe driving.
Perform regular checks on the windscreen
wiper and headlight wash system 3 to
ensure they are operating correctly. We
recommend wiper blade replacement at
least once a year.
If the windscreen is dirty, operate the
windscreen wash system before switching
on the windscreen wiper or setting the
wiper to automatic operation with the rain
sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear.
Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or
set to automatic operation with the rain
sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up, as this
could damage the wiper blades or the
wiper system.
297
If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass,
we recommend that it be released with the
aid of Vauxhall De-icer Spray before
starting the vehicle, to prevent wiper motor
damage.
Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with
a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen
Wash Solvent.
Wiper blades whose lips have become
hardened, cracked or covered with silicone
must be replaced. This may be necessary
as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt
or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning
agents.
Switch off the windscreen wiper or
automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in
car washes – see pages 17, 18, 303.
Windscreen wiper care – see page 304.
Picture no: 17315t.tif
To ensure proper operation of the rain
sensor 3 the sensor area must be free
from dust, dirt and ice, which is why
the windscreen wash system must be
operated at regular intervals and the
sensor area de-iced. Vehicles with rain
sensor 3 can be identified by the sensor
area near the top of the windscreen.
298
Maintenance, inspection system
Picture no: 17316t.tif
Service setting for front windscreen wiper
(e.g. for changing or cleaning the front
wiper blades).
Within 4 seconds of switching off the
engine but with the key in the starter
switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk
downward. Release the stalk as soon as
the wiper blades are vertical.
Picture no: 17317t.tif
Wiper blades on the windscreen
Activate service setting - see previous
column. Raise wiper arm, tilt wiper blade
at a 90° to the wiper arm and remove to
the side.
Picture no: 17318t.tif
Wiper blade on the rear window 3
Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade as
shown in illustration and remove.
Maintenance, inspection system
The windscreen wash system and
headlight wash system will not freeze
in winter:
Frost protection
down to
– 5 °C
– 10 °C
– 20 °C
– 30 °C
Picture no: 17319t.tif
Windscreen and headlight
wash systems 3
The fluid reservoir filler neck for the
windscreen wash system and headlight
wash system 3 is located at the front next
to the left headlight.
Capacities – see pages 336, 337.
Fill only with clean water to prevent the
nozzles from clogging. To improve
cleaning efficiency, we recommend that
you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash
Solvent.
Mixture
Vauxhall
Windscreen Wash
Solvent : Water
1:3
1:2
1:1
2:1
When closing the reservoir, press the lid
firmly over the beaded edge all the way
round.
299
300
Maintenance, inspection system
Laying up the vehicle for more than
4 weeks can lead to battery discharge,
which may reduce the service life of the
battery. Disconnect battery from on-board
power supply by detaching negative
terminal (Vauxhall alarm system 3 is then
disabled).
Protecting electronic components
Ensure that ignition is switched off before
connecting battery. Then perform the
following actions:
To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not
make any modifications to the electrical
system, e. g. connecting additional
consumers or tampering with electronic
control units (chip tuning).
z Setting date and time in the information
display – see pages 48, 51, 56.
Battery
Picture no: 17320t.tif
The battery is maintenance-free.
9 Warning
We recommend that you have battery
changes carried out by a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer. A Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer knows the laws
concerning the disposal of used batteries
and therefore protects the environment
and your health.
Retro-fitted electrical or electronic
accessories can place an additional
load on the battery or even discharge
the battery. We recommend that you
consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer
regarding technical possibilities, such as
fitting a more powerful battery.
z If necessary activate the windows 3
and sunroof 3 – see pages 143, 144.
In order to prevent the battery from
discharging, some consumers such as the
courtesy light automatically switch off
after approx. 20 minutes.
In order to prevent faults in electronic
components in the electrical system, never
connect or disconnect battery with engine
running or ignition switched on. Never start
engine with battery disconnected, e.g.
when starting using jump leads.
9 Warning
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Disconnecting / connecting the battery
from / to the electrical system
Disconnect the battery from the vehicle
electrical system before charging: First
detach the negative and then the positive
lead. Do not reverse the polarity of the
battery, i.e. do not confuse the terminals
for the positive and negative leads. When
connecting, start with the positive lead and
then connect the negative lead.
Maintenance, inspection system
Vehicle decommissioning
Observe national regulations.
If the vehicle is decommissioned for several
months, the following work must be carried
out in order to prevent damage. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
z Wash and preserve the vehicle –
see page 303.
z Check preservation in engine
compartment and on underbody and
rectify where necessary.
z Clean and wax the rubber seals of the
bonnet, doors and roof. Intermediate
roof position for cleaning –
see page 149.
z Change engine oil – see page 293.
z Check anti-freeze and corrosion
protection – see page 294.
z Check the coolant level, top up with
anti-freeze if necessary – see page 295.
z Empty windscreen wash system and
headlight wash system.
z Increase tyre pressure to value specified
for full load – see page 327.
Vehicle storage
z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place.
With manual transmission or
Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse
gear. With automatic transmission 3,
selector lever in P. Use chocks or the
like to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
301
Vehicle recommissioning
Observe national regulations.
Perform the following work before
recommissioning the vehicle:
z Connect battery – see page 300.
z Do not apply handbrake.
z Check tyre pressure and correct if
necessary – see page 327.
z Disconnect battery by disengaging
negative terminal from vehicle electrical
system – see page 300.
z Fill up windscreen wash system –
see page 299.
z Check engine oil level – see page 292.
z Check the coolant level; top up with
anti-freeze if necessary – see page 295.
z Fit the number plate if necessary.
302
Vehicle care
Vehicle care
Obtain advice from a Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer regarding cleaning materials that
have been tested and recommended by
Vauxhall.
When caring for your vehicle, observe all
national environmental regulations,
particularly when washing it.
Vehicle care aids 3..............................
Washing ...............................................
Waxing .................................................
Polishing ...............................................
Wheels ..................................................
Paintwork damage ..............................
Exterior lights .......................................
Exterior lights .......................................
Plastic and rubber parts .....................
Wheels and tyres .................................
Interior and upholstery........................
Seat belts..............................................
Windows ...............................................
Windscreen wiper blades ....................
Locks.....................................................
Engine compartment...........................
Underbody ...........................................
Astra TwinTop .....................................
302
303
303
303
303
304
304
304
304
304
304
304
304
304
305
305
305
305
Regular, thorough care helps to improve
the appearance of your vehicle and
maintain its value over the years. It is also
a prerequisite for warranty claims for any
paint or corrosion damage. The following
pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if
used properly, will help combat the
unavoidable, damaging effects of the
environment.
Vehicle care aids 3
Vehicle wash:
z Wash brush,
z Car Shampoo,
z Car Sponges,
z Insect Removal Sponge,
z Wheel Cleaners,
z Engine Cleaners,
z Glass Cleaners,
z Chamois Leather.
Vehicle care:
z Paintwork Cleaner,
z Paintwork Polish,
z Cream Polish,
z Metallic Paintwork Wax,
z Hard wax,
z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint,
z Vauxhall Touch-Up / Aerosol Paint,
z Wheel Preserver,
z Insect Remover,
z Window Cleaning Spray,
z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent,
z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals,
z Rust Preventative,
z Alloy Wheel Cleaner,
z Cleaner.
Vehicle care
Washing
The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to
environmental influences, e.g. continuous
changes in weather conditions, industrial
waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so
wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When
using automatic car washes, select a
programme which includes waxing.
Bird droppings, dead insects, resin,
pollen and the like should be cleaned off
immediately, as they contain aggressive
constituents which can cause paint
damage.
If using a car wash, comply with the
pertinent instructions of the car wash
manufacturer. The windscreen wiper and
rear window wiper must be switched off –
see pages 17, 18. Remove antenna 3 and
roof rack 3. Stand on the door sill to reach
them more easily.
If you wash your vehicle by hand, make
sure that the insides of the wings are also
thoroughly rinsed out.
Clean edges and folds on opened doors
and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the
vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use
separate leathers for paint and window
surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows
will impair vision.
Observe national regulations.
Waxing
Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular
after it has been washed using shampoo
and at the latest when water no longer
forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise
the paintwork will dry out.
Also wax edges and folds on opened doors
and flaps as well as the areas they cover.
303
Polishing
Polishing is necessary only if the paint
has become dull or if solid deposits have
become attached to it.
Paintwork polish with silicone forms a
protective film, making waxing
unnecessary.
Plastic body parts should not be treated
with wax and polish.
Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles
with a metallic-effect paint finish.
Wheels
Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to
clean the wheels.
Wheels are painted and can be treated
with the same agents as the body. For alloy
wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel
Preserver.
304
Vehicle care
Paintwork damage
Plastic and rubber parts
Repair small areas of paint damage
such as stone impacts, scratches etc.
immediately using a Vauxhall touch-up
applicator or Vauxhall spray and touch-up
paint before rust can form. If rust has
already formed, have the cause remedied.
We recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also
pay attention to surfaces and edges
beneath the vehicle where rust may have
formed unnoticed for some time.
For additional cleaning of plastic and
rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any
other agent, and in particular do not use
solvents or petrol.
Exterior lights
Headlight and other protective light bezels
are made of plastic. If they require
additional cleaning after the vehicle has
been washed, clean them with Car
Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or
caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,
and do not clean them dry.
Wheels and tyres
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
Interior and upholstery
Clean the vehicle interior, including the
instrument panel facia, using interior
cleaner.
The instrument panel should only be
cleaned using a soft damp cloth.
Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum
cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use
cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and
vinyl.
Do not use cleaning agents such as
acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, pint
remover, nail varnish remover, washing
powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.
Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could
damage seat upholstery. Make sure
Velcro fasteners are closed.
Seat belts
Always keep seat belts clean and dry.
Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner.
Windows
When cleaning the heated rear window,
make sure that the heating element on the
inside of the window is not damaged.
Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather
in conjunction with Window Cleaner and
Insect Remover.
Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is
suitable for de-icing windows.
For mechanical removal of ice, use a
commercially available sharp-edged ice
scraper. Press the scraper firmly against
the glass so that no dirt can get under it
and scratch the glass.
Windscreen wiper blades
Wax, such as that used in car washes, can
cause streaks to form on the windscreen
when the wiper is used.
Vehicle care
Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with
a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen
Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary –
see page 297.
Locks
The locks are lubricated with a high-grade
lock cylinder grease at the factory.
Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the
locks from freezing up. Only use de-icing
agent in emergencies, as they have a
degreasing effect and will impair the
function of the locks. After using a de-icing
agent, have the locks re-greased. We
recommend that you entrust this to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Engine compartment
Areas of the engine compartment that are
painted in the same colour as the vehicle
must be looked after like any other painted
surface.
It is advisable to wash the engine
compartment before and after winter and
preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and
brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets
before washing the engine.
When washing the engine with a steam-jet
cleaner, do not direct the steam jet at
components of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS), the air conditioning system, the
climate control system or the belt drive and
its components.
Protective wax that has been applied is
also removed during the engine wash. For
this reason, have the engine, brake system
components in the engine compartment,
axle components with steering, body parts
and cavities thoroughly preserved with
protective wax after the wash. We
recommend that you consult your Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer.
An engine wash can be performed in the
spring in order to remove dirt that has
adhered to the engine compartment,
which may also have a high salt content.
Check protective wax layer and make good
if necessary.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
Underbody
Your vehicle has a factory-applied
PVC undercoating in the wheel arches
(including the longitudinal members) which
provides permanent protection and needs
no special maintenance. The surfaces of
the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC
are provided with a durable protective wax
coating in critical areas.
On vehicles which are washed frequently in
automatic car washes with underbody
washing facility, the protective wax
coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving
additives.
305
Check the underbody after washing and
have it waxed if necessary. Before the start
of the cold weather season, check the PVC
coating and protective wax coating. Have
them restored to perfect condition if
necessary.
Caution - commercially available bitumen /
rubber materials can damage the PVC
coating. We recommend that you have
underbody work carried out by a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer, who knows the
prescribed materials and has experience in
the use thereof.
The underbody should be washed
following the end of the cold weather
season to remove any dirt adhering to the
underbody since this may also contain salt.
Check protective wax coating and, if
necessary, have it restored to perfect
condition.
Astra TwinTop
Treat all seals, e.g. on the roof and
windscreen frame, with silicone oil from
time to time. Good contact between the
fine rubber lips and the sealing surfaces
prevents leaks and reduces clamping
forces.
Intermediate roof position for cleaning –
see page 149.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
306
Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle documents,
identification plate............................
Vehicle identification data..................
Coolant, brake fluid, oils .....................
Engine data..........................................
Performance.........................................
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions ......
Weights, payload and roof load ........
Tyres .....................................................
Electrical system ..................................
Capacities ............................................
Dimensions ...........................................
Installation dimensions of trailer
towing equipment.............................
Picture no: 17321t.tif
306
307
307
308
310
313
318
326
335
336
338
339
Vehicle documents,
identification plate
The technical data is determined in
accordance with European Community
standards. We reserve the right to make
modifications. Specifications in the vehicle
documents always have priority over those
given in this manual.
The identification plate is affixed to the
front right door frame.
Picture no: 17322t.tif
Information on identification plate:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Manufacturer
Type approval number
Vehicle Identification Number
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight
Permissible Gross Train Weight
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle-specific or country-specific data
Technical data
307
Coolant, brake fluid, oils
When topping up
– coolant,
– brake fluid,
– manual transmission oil,
– automatic transmission oil,
– power steering oil,
we recommend that you consult your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can
advise you on the correct products to use.
Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious
damage to the vehicle.
Picture no: 17323t.tif
Vehicle identification data
The Vehicle Identification Number is
stamped on the identification plate (see
previous page) and in the vehicle floor on
the right-hand side under a cover between
the driver’s door and seat.
Picture no: 17324t.tif
The Vehicle Identification Number may be
embossed on the instrument panel.
Engine code and engine number: stamped
on left-hand side of engine on crankcase.
Engine oils
Information on engine oils is found in the
Service Booklet.
308
Technical data
Engine data
Sales designation
Engine identifier code
1.4
Z 14 XEP
1.6
Z 16 XEP
1.8
Z 18 XE
2.0 Turbo
Z 20 LEL
2.0 Turbo
Z 20 LER
Number of cylinders
4
4
4
4
4
Bore dia. (mm)
73.4
79.0
80.5
86.0
86.0
80.6
81.5
88.2
86.0
86.0
Piston displacement (cm )
1364
1598
1796
1998
1998
Brake horse power (kW)
at rpm
66
5600
77
6000
92
5600
125
5200
147
5400
Torque (Nm)
at rpm
125
4000
150
3900
170
3800
250
1950
262
4200
10.5
10.5
10.5
8.8
8.8
95 2)
98 2))
91 2)3)
95 2)
98 2)
91 2)3)
95 2)
98 2)
91 2)
95 2)
98 2)
91 2)4)
95 2)
98 2)
91 2)4)
Max. permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6200
6400
6400
6400
6400
Oil consumption (l/1000 km)
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
Stroke (mm)
3
Compression ratio
Octane requirement (RON)
unleaded
or unleaded
or unleaded
1)
2)
3)
4)
1)
0.6
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
Use of 91 RON fuel reduces power and torque.
If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous
terrain with a caravan / trailer load or high payload.
Technical data
Engine data
Sales designation
Engine identifier code
VXR
Z 20 LEH
1.3 CDTI
Z 13 DTH
1.7 CDTI
Z 17 DTH
1.9 CDTI
Z 19 DT
1.9 CDTI
Z 19 DTH
Number of cylinders
4
4
4
4
4
Bore dia. (mm)
86.0
69.6
79.0
82.0
82.0
86.0
82.0
86.0
90.4
90.4
Piston displacement (cm )
1998
1248
1686
1910
1910
Brake horse power (kW)
at rpm
177
5600
66
4000
74
4400
88
3250
110
4000
Torque (Nm)
at rpm
320
2400 to 5000
200
1750 to 2500
240
2300
280
1750 to 2750
320
2000 to 2750
8.8
18.0
18.4
18.0
17.5
95 2)3)
98 2)
91 2)4)
–
–
–
–
49 (D)5)
–
–
–
49 (D)5)
–
–
–
49 (D)5)
–
–
–
49 (D)5)
Max. permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6400
5100 to 5300
5200
5200
5200
Oil consumption (l/1000 km)
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
Stroke (mm)
3
Compression ratio
Octane requirement (RON)
unleaded
or unleaded
or unleaded
Cetane requirement (CN)1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
1)
0.6
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
Use of 95 RON fuel reduces power and torque. Slight increase in fuel consumption.
If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous
terrain with a caravan / trailer load or high payload.
A lower value is possible with winter diesel fuels.
309
310
Technical data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), 5-door
Engine
1)
Hatchback
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
111/178
110/176
–
115/185
115/185
–
123/198
–
117/188
135/217
–
–
143/230
–
–
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
107/172
– 3)
–
112/180
–
–
121/194
–
117/188
129/208
–
–
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Engine1)
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
1)
2)
3)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
Value not available at time of printing.
Technical data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), 3-door
1)
Hatchback
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
112/180
111/178
–
116/187
116/187
–
124/200
–
118/190
137/220
–
–
145/234
–
–
Engine1)
Z 20 LEH VXR
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
152/244
–
–
108/174
–3)
–
113/182
–
–
122/196
–
118/190
130/210
–
–
Engine
2)
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
1)
2)
3)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
Value not available at time of printing.
311
312
Technical data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h),
Engine
Estate
1)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
111/178
–
–
115/185
115/185
–
123/198
–
115/188
135/217
–
–
143/230
–
–
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
107/172
–
–
112/180
–
–
120/193
–
116/187
129/207
–
–
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Engine1)
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), TwinTop
Engine
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Z 19 DTH
Maximum speed2)
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
116/186
–
–
–3)
–
–
139/224
–
–
147/237
–
–
132/213
–
–
1)
2)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
3)
Value not available at time of printing.
Technical data
Fuel consumption,
CO2 emissions
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed
by 1999/100/EC) has applied for the
measurement of fuel consumption
since 1996.
The directive is oriented to actual driving
practices: Urban driving is rated at
approx. 1/3 and extra-urban driving with
approx. 2/3 (urban and extra-urban
consumption). Cold starts and acceleration
phases are also taken into consideration.
The specification of CO2 emission is also a
constituent of the directive.
313
The figures given must not be taken as a
guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
of a particular vehicle.
All values are based on the EU base
model with standard equipment.
The calculation of fuel consumption as
specified by directive 1999/100/EC takes
account of the vehicle’s kerbweight,
ascertained in accordance with these
regulations. Optional extras may result
in slightly higher fuel consumption
and CO2 emission levels than those
quoted.
To convert 1/100 km into mpg, divide 282
by number of litres/100 km.
Saving fuel, protecting the environment –
see page 198.
314
Technical data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 5-door (tyre width up to 205 mm1))
Engine2)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
8.2/ 7.7/–
urban
5.2/ 4.9/–
extra-urban
6.3/ 5.9/–
total
151/142/–
CO2
8.6/ 8.5/–
5.4/ 5.3/–
6.6/ 6.5/–
158/156/–
10.4/–/11.4
6.1/–/ 6.3
7.7/–/ 8.2
185/–/197
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
Engine2)
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
6.2/–3)/–
4.0/– /–
4.8/– /–
130/– /–
6.4/–/–
4.2/–/–
5.0/–/–
135/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Engine2)
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
8.4/ 7.9/–
urban
5.4/ 5.1/–
extra-urban
6.5/ 6.1/–
total
156/146/–
CO2
8.8/ 8.7/–
5.6/ 5.5/–
6.8/ 6.7/–
163/161/–
10.6/–/11.6
6.3/–/ 6.5
7.9/–/ 8.4
190/–/202
12.8/–/–
6.8/–/–
9.0/–/–
216/–/–
13.1/–/–
7.1/–/–
9.3/–/–
223/–/–
Engine2)
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
–/–3)/–
–/– /–
–/– /–
–/– /–
6.5/–/–
4.3/–/–
5.1/–/–
138/–/–
7.7/–/ 9.8
5.0/–/ 5.5
6.0/–/ 7.1
162/–/192
7.4/–/–
4.9/–/–
5.8/–/–
157/–/–
1)
2)
3)
For Z 17 DTH engine – tyre width up to 195 mm.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Values not available at time of printing.
Z 14 XEP
Technical data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 3-door (tyre width up to 205 mm1))
Engine2)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
8.2/ 7.7/–
5.2/ 4.9/–
6.3/ 5.9/–
151/142/–
8.6/ 8.5/–
5.4/ 5.3/–
6.6/ 6.5/–
158/156/–
10.4/–/11.3
6.1/–/ 6.2
7.7/–/ 8.1
185/–/194
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
Engine2)
Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
6.4/–/–
4.2/–/–
5.0/–/–
135/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
6.2/–3)/–
4.0/– /–
4.8/– /–
130/– /–
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 3-door (tyre width up to 225 mm4))
Engine2)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
8.4/ 7.9/–
5.4/ 5.1/–
6.5/ 6.1/–
156/146/–
8.8/ 8.7/–
5.6/ 5.5/–
6.8/ 6.7/–
163/161/–
10.6/–/11.5
6.3/–/ 6.4
7.9/–/ 8.3
190/–/199
12.8/–/–
6.8/–/–
9.0/–/–
216/–/–
13.1/–/–
7.1/–/–
9.3/–/–
223/–/–
Engine2)
Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
6.5/–/–
4.3/–/–
5.1/–/–
138/–/–
7.7/–/ 9.7
5.0/–/ 5.4
6.0/–/ 7.0
162/–/189
7.4/–/–
4.9/–/–
5.8/–/–
157/–/–
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
13.0/–/–
urban
7.0/–/–
extra-urban
9.2/–/–
total
221/–/–
CO2
1)
2)
3)
4)
For Z 17 DTH engine – tyre width up to 195 mm.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Values not available at time of printing.
For Z 20 LEH engine – tyre width up to 235 mm.
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
315
316
Technical data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 205 mm1))
Engine2)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
8.2/–/–
5.2/–/–
6.3/–/–
151/–/–
8.7/ 8.6/–
5.5/ 5.4/–
6.7/ 6.6/–
161/158/–
10.5/–/11.4
6.2/–/ 6.3
7.8/–/ 8.2
187/–/197
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
Engine2)
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
6.2/–/–
4.0/–/–
4.8/–/–
130/–/–
6.4/–/–
4.2/–/–
5.0/–/–
135/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Engine2)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
8.4/–/–
5.4/–/–
6.5/–/–
156/–/–
8.9/ 8.8/–
5.7/ 5.6/–
6.9/ 6.8/–
166/163/–
10.7/–/11.6
6.4/–/ 6.5
8.0/–/ 8.4
192/–/202
12.9/–/–
6.9/–/–
9.1/–/–
218/–/–
13.2/–/–
7.2/–/–
9.4/–/–
226/–/–
Engine2)
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
–/–/–
6.5/–/–
4.3/–/–
5.1/–/–
138/–/–
7.8/–/ 9.8
5.1/–/ 5.5
6.1/–/ 7.1
165/–/192
7.5/–/–
5.0/–/–
5.9/–/–
159/–/–
1)
2)
For Z 17 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Technical data
317
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), TwinTop (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Engine1)
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Z 19 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission
urban
extra-urban
total
CO2
9.1/–/–
5.8/–/–
7.0/–/–
168/–/–
–2)
–2)
–2)
–2)
13.0/–/–
7.0/–/–
9.2/–/–
221/–/–
13.3/–/–
7.3/–/–
9.5/–/–
228/–/–
7.7/–/–
5.2/–/–
6.1/–/–
165/–/–
1)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
2) Value not available at time of printing.
318
Technical data
Weights, payload and roof load
The payload is the difference between
the permitted Gross Vehicle Weight
(see identification plate on page 306) and
the EC kerbweight.
To calculate the kerbweight, enter the data
for your vehicle below:
z Kerbweight from
Table 1,
page 319
+ .............. kg
z Additional weight of
equipment versions from
Table 2, page 323
+ .............. kg
z Weight of heavy
accessories from
Table 3,
page 325
+ .............. kg
The total
= .............. kg
is the EC kerbweight.
Optional equipment and accessories
increase the kerbweight, which means that
the payload will also change slightly.
Note the weights given in the vehicle
documents.
The combined total of front and rear
axle loads must not exceed the permissible
Gross Vehicle Weight. For example, if
the front axle is bearing its maximum
permissible load, the rear axle can only
bear a load that is equal to the Gross
Vehicle Weight minus the front axle load.
Roof load
The permissible roof load is 75 kg and
100 kg for caravan with roof railing.
The roof load is the combined weight of the
roof rack and the load.
With a trailer coupled and the towing
vehicle fully loaded (including all
occupants) the permissible rear axle
load (see identification plate or vehicle
documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
and permissible Gross Vehicle Weight by
45 kg for the Hatchback. For the Estate,
the permissible rear axle load may be
exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible
Gross Vehicle Weight by 30 kg. If the
permissible rear axle load is exceeded,
a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)
applies. If national regulations specify a
lower maximum speed for vehicles towing
a trailer, this must be observed.
Driving hints – see page 196.
Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing –
see page 234.
See the identification plate or vehicle
documents for permissible axle loads.
Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra
TwinTop.
Technical data
Weight (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), Hatchback 5-door
Model
Engine2)
Manual
transmission
Easytronic
Automatic
transmission
Astra
Z 14 XEP
1230
1230
–
Z 16 XEP
1265
1265
–
Z 18 XE
1278
–
1310
Z 13 DTH
1330
–
–
Z 17 DTH
1365
–
–
Z 19 DT
1395
–
1425
Z 19 DTH
1393
–
–
Z 14 XEP
1250
1250
–
Z 16 XEP
1285
1285
–
Z 18 XE
1298
–
1330
Z 20 LEL
1385
–
–
Z 20 LER
1385
–
–
Z 13 DTH
1345
–
–
Z 17 DTH
1380
–
–
Z 19 DT
1410
–
1440
Z 19 DTH
1408
–
–
Astra
with
air conditioning
system
or
Electronic Climate
Control (ECC)
1)
2)
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
319
320
Technical data
Weight (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), Hatchback 3-door
Model
Engine2)
Manual
transmission
Easytronic
Automatic
transmission
Astra
Z 14 XEP
1210
–
–
Z 16 XEP
1245
1245
–
Z 18 XE
1265
–
1297
Z 13 DTH
1310
–
–
Z 17 DTH
1345
–
–
Z 19 DT
1370
–
1393
Z 19 DTH
1390
–
–
Z 14 XEP
1230
–
–
Z 16 XEP
1265
1265
–
Astra
with
air conditioning
system
or
Electronic Climate
Control (ECC)
1)
2)
Z 18 XE
1285
–
1317
Z 20 LEL
1365
–
–
Z 20 LER
1365
–
–
Z 20 LEH VXR
1393
–
–
Z 13 DTH
1325
–
–
Z 17 DTH
1360
–
–
Z 19 DT
1385
–
1408
Z 19 DTH
1405
–
–
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Technical data
Weights (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), Estate
Model
Engine2)
Manual
transmission
Easytronic
Automatic
transmission
Astra
Z 14 XEP
1280
–
–
Z 16 XEP
1315
1315
–
Z 18 XE
1325
–
1350
Z 13 DTH
1380
–
–
Z 17 DTH
1393
–
–
Z 19 DT
1435
–
1465
Z 19 DTH
1450
–
–
Z 14 XEP
1300
–
–
Z 16 XEP
1335
1335
–
Astra
with
air conditioning
system
or
Electronic Climate
Control (ECC)
1)
2)
Z 18 XE
1345
–
1370
Z 20 LEL
1425
–
–
Z 20 LER
1425
–
–
Z 13 DTH
1395
–
–
Z 17 DTH
1408
–
–
Z 19 DT
1450
–
1480
Z 19 DTH
1465
–
–
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
321
322
Technical data
Weights (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), TwinTop
Model
Engine2)
Manual transmission
Easytronic
Automatic transmission
Astra
Z 16 XEP
1495
–
–
Z 18 XE
1500
–
–
Z 19 DTH
1613
–
–
Z 16 XEP
1515
–
–
Z 18 XE
1520
–
–
Z 20 LEL
1605
–
–
Astra
with
air conditioning
system
or
Electronic Climate
Control (ECC)
1)
2)
Z 20 LER
1605
–
–
Z 19 DTH
1628
–
–
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full).
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Technical data
Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions
Hatchback
Engine1)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Life, Club
2.9
2.9
2.9
2.9
2.9
Design
12
12
12
12
12
SXi, SRi
24.5
24.5
24.5
12.6
12.6
Elite
22.8
22.8
22.8
9.3
9.3
Engine1)
Z 20 LEH VXR
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Life, Club
–
2.9
2.9
2.9
2.9
Design
–
12
12
12
12
SXi, SRi
–
24.5
24.5
24.5
12.6
Elite
–
22.8
22.8
22.8
9.3
1)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
323
324
Technical data
Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions
Estate
Engine1)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Life, Club
7.4
7.4
7.4
3
Design
13
13
13
9
SXi, SRi
9
9
9
7.3
Elite
9
9
9
5
Engine1)
Z 20 LER
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Life, Club
3
7.4
3
3
Design
9
13
9
9
SXi, SRi
7.3
9
7.3
7.3
Elite
5
9
5
5
1)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Technical data
Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions
TwinTop
Engine1)
Z 16 XEP
2)
Life, Club
–
Design
–2)
Z 18 XE
–
2)
–2)
Z 20 LEL
2)
Z 20 LER
Z 19 DTH
–
–
2)
–2)
–2)
–2)
–2)
Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories
Accessories
Sunroof
Towing equipment
Split rear seat bench
Weight
25 (Hatchback 5-door, Estate)
23 (Hatchback 3-door)
22 (Hatchback 5-door, Estate)
20 (Hatchback 3-door)
10 (Hatchback 5-door)
20 (Estate)
9 (Hatchback 3-door)
1)
2)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Value not available at time of printing.
325
326
Technical data
Tyres
Tyre chains 3
Restrictions
Not all tyres available on the market
currently meet the structural requirements.
We recommend that you consult a
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning
suitable tyre makes.
Restrictions
Tyre chains may be used on the front
wheels only.
These tyres have undergone special tests
to establish their reliability, safety and
specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles.
Despite continuous market monitoring, we
are unable to assess these attributes for
other tyres, even if they have been granted
approval by the relevant authorities or in
some other form.
Further information – see page 226.
Winter tyres 3
Tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18 or 235/35 R 19 are not to
be used as winter tyres. Tyres of size
225/45 R 17 may be used as winter tyres
on the Astra TwinTop.
If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre.
Use of the spare wheel may alter vehicle
handling. Obtain a replacement for the
faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have
the wheel balanced and fitted to the
vehicle.
We recommend the use of Vauxhall-tested
fine-mesh tyre chains that add no more
than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the
inboard sides (including chain lock).
Tyre chains are not permitted on
temporary spare wheel 115/70 R 16 or
on tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18 or 235/35 R 19. Tyre chains are
permitted on tyres of size 225/45 R 17 for
the Astra TwinTop.
Further information – see page 232.
Wheels
Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm.
Depending on the model variant, the spare
wheel may take the form of a temporary
spare wheel: vehicle driveability may be
altered by use of the spare wheel. Obtain a
replacement for the faulty tyre as soon
as possible, and have the wheel balanced
and fitted to the vehicle.
The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre
and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted
on the vehicle1): Using the spare wheel may
alter vehicle handling. Have the defective
tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance
the wheel and have it mounted on the
vehicle.
Tyre pressure in bar / psi2)
The specified tyre pressures are valid for
cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure
resulting from extensive driving must not
be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on
the following pages apply to both summer
and winter tyres.
Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre
pressure for full load - see tables on
following pages.
Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure see tables on next page.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
attaching tyre pressure gauge –
see page 228.
Further information – see pages 226
to 233.
Further information – see page 232.
1)
2)
Country-specific version: The spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Hatchback
Tyre pressure for
load of up to
3 persons
Tyre pressure ECO2) Tyre pressure
loaded up to
for full load
3 people
Engine3)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 14 XEP, 185/65 R 15,
Z 16 XEP, 195/60 R 15,
Z 18 XE 215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.5/36
2.9/42
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
1.9/28
1.9/28
2.4/35
2.4/35
2.0/29
2.5/36
Z 20 LEL 205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
2.7/39
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61
(temporary
spare)4)
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
all
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
327
2)
3)
4)
Tyres
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
328
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Hatchback
Tyre pressure
for load of up
to 3 persons
Tyre pressure
ECO2)
loaded up to
3 people
Tyre pressure for
full load
Engine3)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 20 LER
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
2.7/39
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.6/38
2.4/35
–
–
2.7/39
3.1/45
Z 20 LEH
(VXR)
205/50 R 17,
225/40 R 18,
235/35 R 19
2.4/35
2.4/35
–
–
2.5/36
2.9/42
all
4.2/61
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary spare)4)
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Hatchback
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
for load of up
to 3 persons
Tyre pressure
ECO2)
loaded up to
3 people
Tyre pressure for
full load
Engine3)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 13 DTH
185/65 R 15,
195/60 R 15
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.5/36
2.9/42
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
2.1/30
2.1/30
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
4.2/61
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary spare)4)
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
all
1)
329
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
330
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Hatchback
Tyre pressure for
full load
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 17 DTH
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.1/30
2.1/30
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
2.7/39
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.6/38
2.4/35
–
–
2.7/39
3.1/45
4.2/61
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary spare)4)
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
all
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
ECO2) loaded
up to 3 people
Engine3)
Z 19 DT,
Z 19 DTH
1)
Tyre pressure
for load of up
to 3 persons
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Estate
Tyre pressure
ECO2) loaded
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure for
full load
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 14 XEP,
Z 16 XEP,
Z 18 XE
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.0/29
2.0/29
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.1/30
2.6/38
185/65 R 15,
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.5/36
2.9/42
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
2.7/39
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
2.7/39
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.7/39
2.5/36
–
–
2.8/41
3.1/45
4.2/61
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary spare)4)
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
Z 20 LER
all
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
for load of up
to 3 persons
Engine3)
Z 20 LEL
1)
331
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
332
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Estate
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure for
full load
Engine3)
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 13 DTH
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16
2.1/30
2.1/30
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
185/65 R 15,
195/60 R 15
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.5/36
2.9/42
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary
spare)4)
4.2/61
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
all
1)
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
for load of up to ECO2) loaded
up to 3 people
3 persons
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
Estate
Tyre pressure
ECO2) loaded
up to 3 people
Tyre pressure for
full load
Tyres
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 17 DTH
195/65 R 15,
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.1/30
2.1/30
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
2.7/39
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.9/42
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
2.7/39
2.5/36
–
–
2.8/41
3.1/45
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary
spare)4)
4.2/61
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
all
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
for load of up
to 3 persons
Engine3)
Z 19 DT,
Z 19 DTH
1)
333
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
334
Technical data
(ctd.)
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1)
TwinTop
Tyre pressure for
full load
Tyres –
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Z 16 XEP,
Z 18 XE
205/55 R 16
225/45 R 17
2.1/30
2.1/30
2.5/36
2.5/36
2.2/32
2.6/38
225/40 R 18
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.4/35
2.8/41
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.4/35
2.8/41
225/40 R 18
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
205/55 R 16
225/45 R 17
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
225/40 R 18
2.6/38
2.4/35
–
–
2.7/39
3.1/45
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
2.3/33
2.1/30
–
–
2.4/35
2.8/41
225/40 R 18
2.5/36
2.3/33
–
–
2.6/38
3.0/44
T 115/70 R 16
(temporary
spare)4)
4.2/61
4.2/61
–
–
4.2/61
4.2/61
Z 20 LER
Z 19 DTH
all
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
Tyre pressure
ECO2) loaded
up to 3 people
Engine3)
Z 20 LEL
1)
Tyre pressure
for load of up
to 3 persons
2)
3)
4)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
Technical data
Electrical system
Battery,
Voltage
12 Volt
Amp hours
36 Ah / 44 Ah 3 / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 /
66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3
Battery for remote control of
central locking system and electronic key
of Open&Start system
CR 20 32
335
336
Technical data
Capacities
(approx. litre)
Engine1)
Z 14 XEP
Z 16 XEP
Z 18 XE
Z 20 LEL
Z 20 LER
Fuel tank (nominal content)
52
52
52
52
52
Engine oil with filter change
between MIN and MAX on dipstick
3.5
1.0
4.5
1.0
4.5
1.0
4.25
1.0
4.25
1.0
Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash system
with headlight wash system
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
1)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
Technical data
Capacities
(approx. litre)
Engine1)
Z 20 LEH VXR
Z 13 DTH
Z 17 DTH
Z 19 DT
Z 19 DTH
Fuel tank (nominal content)
52
52
52
52
52
Engine oil with filter change
between MIN and MAX on dipstick
5.0
1.0
3.2
1.0
5.0
1.0
4.3
1.0
4.3
1.0
Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash system
with headlight wash system
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
2.4
4.0
1)
Sales designation – see pages 308, 309.
337
338
Technical data
Dimensions
(approx. mm)
Hatchback 5-door
Hatchback 3-door
Estate
TwinTop
Overall length
4249
4290
4515
4476
Width
1753
1753
1753
1759
Width with two exterior mirrors
2033
2033
2033
2039
Overall height
1460
1435
1500
1411
2614
2614
2703
2614
11.20
11.20
11.50
11.20
Wheelbase
Turning circle diameter
1)
In metres.
1)
Technical data
Installation dimensions
of trailer towing equipment
with detachable coupling ball
bar, Hatchback1)
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimension
mm
A
342.9
B
83
C
513.4
D
488.6
E
211.4
F
94.3
G
160
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
retro-fitting of towing equipment to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
1)
Do not mount towing equipment to vehicles
with Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation –
see page 308.
339
340
Technical data
Installation dimensions
of trailer towing equipment
with detachable coupling ball
bar, Estate
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimension
mm
A
84.0
B
570.0
C
515.0
D
93.5
E
173.0
F
307.6
G
158.0
H
292.6
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
retro-fitting of towing equipment to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
Technical data
Installation dimensions
of trailer towing equipment
with detachable coupling ball
bar, Astra TwinTop
All measurements refer to Vauxhallapproved towing equipment.
Dimension
mm
A
68.8
B
570.0
C
515.0
D
485.0
E
93.5
F
288.0
G
245.0
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
retro-fitting of towing equipment to your
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
341
342
Index
Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................ 224
Accessories..............................128, 133, 248
Accessory socket .................................... 106
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) ......... 137
Bulb replacement ............................... 272
Driving abroad.................................... 140
Air conditioning system ................. 153, 160
Air intake................................................. 173
Air quality sensor.................................... 168
Air recirculation system..........160, 164, 172
Air vents .................................................. 155
Airbags.................................................... 116
Alarm system ............................................ 83
Alternator.................................................. 39
Antenna ............................................ 64, 303
Anti-freeze protection.................... 294, 299
Anti-knock quality of fuel ...................... 200
Octane number........................... 308, 309
Anti-theft locking system ......................... 76
Towing equipment ............................. 237
Anti-theft protection ................................ 24
Aquaplaning........................................... 230
Armrest........................................89, 90, 108
Ashtray............................................ 106, 140
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror... 132
Automatic air recirculation mode . 168, 172
Automatic transmission.....20, 21, 182, 188
Automatic mode ........................ 183, 189
Control indicator......................... 184, 191
Driving programme.................... 184, 191
Fault ............................................ 186, 194
Interruption of power supply ..... 187, 195
Kickdown..................................... 185, 192
Manual mode ..................................... 190
Selector lever.......... 20, 21, 183, 189, 190
Winter programme..................... 185, 192
Automatic wiping..................................... 17
Index
B
C
Battery .................................... 197, 300, 335
Interruption of
power supply.............. 143, 180, 187, 195
Battery discharge protection................. 140
Before starting-off .................................... 22
Belt tensioners......................................... 111
Bleeding, diesel fuel system................... 243
Board information display ....................... 46
Bonnet ....................................................... 86
Boot, see Luggage compartment .....81, 91
Brake assist ............................................. 222
Brake light ............................................... 222
Brake system............................................. 38
Brakes ...................................................... 222
ABS....................................................... 224
Brake assist ......................................... 222
Brake fluid ........................................... 296
Brake lights..................................276, 282
Brake servo unit .................................. 196
Footbrake ............................................ 222
Handbrake .......................................... 223
Bulb replacement ...........................266, 268
Bulbs ....................................... 133, 266, 268
Capacities ....................................... 336, 337
Car Pass ...................................................... 2
Caravan / trailer towing................. 196, 234
Cargo box ............................................... 102
Catalytic converter .................203, 207, 243
Central locking system............................. 76
Changing the battery
Radio frequency
remote control ........................69, 75, 335
Changing tyre / wheel type ................... 226
Changing wheels .................................... 252
Chassis number,
see Vehicle Identification Number ...... 307
Check control ...................................... 30, 62
Child restraint system..................... 128, 133
Child safety locks.............................. 86, 142
Cigarette lighter ............................. 105, 140
Climate control ....................................... 153
Climate control system .................. 154, 167
Clock .......................................................... 44
Clutch operation..................................... 197
CO2 emissions ......................................... 313
Code numbers ............................................ 2
Cold start ................................................ 197
Colour information display ...................... 46
Continuous Damping Control.......... 39, 210
Contrast..................................................... 57
343
Control indicators............................... 10, 37
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)............ 225
Airbag ......................................... 121, 130
Adaptive Forward Lighting ......... 42, 137
Belt tensioners .................................... 112
Brake system....................................... 224
Cruise control...................................... 212
DDS...................................................... 217
Deflation detection system................ 217
Engine electronics............................... 206
ESP (Electronic Stability Programme) 208
Exhaust................................................ 205
IDS+.............................................. 210, 211
Immobiliser............................................ 67
Parking distance sensors ................... 215
Transmission ............................... 184, 191
Tyre pressure monitoring system ...... 220
Coolant ................................................... 294
Coolant level........................................... 295
Coolant temperature ............................... 39
Cooled glove compartment .................. 155
Cooling ............................................ 161, 166
Correcting time................................... 50, 56
Coupling socket load ............................. 240
Courtesy light ......................................... 139
Courtesy lights
Bulb replacement ............................... 286
Cruise control.......................................... 212
Curtain airbags ...................................... 120
Curve lighting (AFL) ......................... 33, 137
344
Index
D
E
F
Data...................................................66, 306
Date .....................................................48, 51
Daytime running lights........................... 134
Decommissioning ................................... 301
Deflation Detection System .............32, 217
Demisting and defrosting
Windows .............................................. 159
With climate control system............... 170
With air conditioning system .....162, 166
Diesel fuel filter ....................................... 294
Diesel fuel system ...........................243, 294
Diesel particle filter...................42, 156, 197
Dipped beam ....................................15, 134
Bulb replacement........................269, 272
Display.................................................43, 46
Display mode ............................................ 58
Door handle lighting .............................. 140
Door locks..........................................66, 305
Doors ......................................................... 38
Door-to-door lighting function .............. 138
Driving abroad................................200, 289
Headlights ........................................... 140
Driving hints ............................................ 196
Easy Load ............................................... 103
Easytronic.......................................... 20, 174
Driving programmes .......................... 176
Fault..................................................... 180
Interruption of power supply ............. 180
Kickdown............................................. 178
Selector lever......................................... 20
Starting-off.......................................... 175
Winter programme ............................. 177
Economical driving ......................... 196, 198
Electric windows ..................................... 141
Electrical system .....................260, 300, 335
Electro-hydraulic
power-assisted steering ....................... 196
Electro-hydraulic
power-assisted steering
fluid...................................................... 307
Electronic components........................... 300
Electronic immobiliser .............................. 67
Electronic Stability Programme ............. 208
Engine code ............................307, 308, 309
Engine control indicator......................... 206
Engine speed .......................................... 197
Engine wash............................................ 305
Entry lighting........................................... 140
Environmental protection .............. 293, 302
Exhaust control indicator....................... 205
Exhaust gases......................................... 206
Exhaust system ....................................... 206
Exterior mirrors ...........................6, 131, 156
Fan ..........................................157, 291, 292
Filling station
Capacities ................................... 336, 337
Engine oil level .................................... 292
Fuel ......................................200, 308, 309
Ignition key ..............................................2
Opening the bonnet............................. 86
Tyre pressure .............................. 199, 326
Vehicle data........................................ 307
Windscreen wash system................... 299
First-aid kit (cushion) ..................... 133, 248
Flat tyre................................................... 256
FlexOrganizer ......................................... 101
Front fog lights ....................................... 135
Bulb replacement ............................... 275
Fog tail light............................................ 135
Bulb replacement ....................... 276, 282
Folding roof, see TwinTop ..................... 146
Footbrake ............................................... 222
Front passenger’s airbag ...................... 116
Fuel..................................200, 201, 308, 309
Fuel consumption...................198, 200, 313
Fuel filler cap .......................................... 201
Fuel filter ................................................. 294
Fuel gauge................................................ 45
Fuel system, diesel ................................. 243
Fuses ....................................................... 260
Index
345
G
H
I
Gears ......................................................... 20
Generator, see Alternator ........................ 39
Genuine Vauxhall Parts
and Accessories ..............................26, 133
Glasses compartment ............................ 108
Glove compartment ............................... 108
Glove compartment lighting.................. 140
Bulb replacement................................ 287
Graphical Information Display ................ 46
Gross Vehicle Weight.............................. 318
Halogen headlight system .................... 268
Bulb replacement ............................... 268
Driving abroad.................................... 140
Handbrake..................................23, 24, 223
Hazard warning lights ..................... 16, 132
Head restraints ...................28, 88, 132, 133
Headlight flash ......................................... 15
Headlight range adjustment......... 136, 268
Headlight switch.......................14, 134, 135
Headlight wash system.................... 18, 299
Headlights................................................. 14
Daytime running lights....................... 134
Driving abroad.................................... 140
Front fog lights ................................... 135
Reversing lights................................... 135
Warning device..................................... 23
Heated exterior mirrors.................... 18, 156
Heated front seats ................................. 156
Heated rear window ........................ 18, 156
Heating ........................................... 153, 158
Seats .................................................... 156
With climate control system .............. 169
With air conditioning system ..... 162, 166
Height adjustment
Seat belts............................................. 113
Steering wheel......................................... 7
High-pressure cleaners ..........238, 304, 305
Hill Start Assist ........................................ 223
Horn........................................................... 16
Identification plate................................. 306
IDS+ (Interactive Driving System).. 208, 210
If you have a problem ..................... 26, 288
Ignition logic ....................................... 51, 58
Ignition system ............................... 291, 300
Immobiliser ............................................... 67
Information display.................................. 46
Infotainment system ................................ 65
Instrument display ................................... 45
Instrument illumination .......................... 138
Bulb replacement ............................... 287
Instrument panel .........................................7
Instruments ............................................... 36
Interactive Driving System (IDS+).. 208, 210
Interior mirror...............................................6
Interruption of power supply..... 60, 63, 143
Easytronic............................................ 180
Electric windows ................................. 143
Selector lever lock....................... 187, 195
ISO-FIX .................................................... 127
J
Jack ......................................................... 251
Jump leads.............................................. 244
346
Index
K
M
O
Key
Extending .............................................. 66
Ignition lock ........................................... 14
Locking doors........................................ 76
Remove.................................................. 24
Starting the engine .........................14, 22
Key numbers ............................................... 2
Keys ........................................................... 66
Main beam........................................ 15, 134
Bulb replacement ....................... 270, 272
Control indicator................................... 40
Maintenance..................................... 26, 290
Air conditioning system...................... 173
Anti-freeze protection ........................ 294
Brake fluid ........................................... 296
Brakes .................................................. 222
Catalytic converter ............................. 207
Engine oil..................................... 292, 293
Fuel consumption ............................... 199
Tyre pressure....................................... 228
Tyres ............................................ 229, 230
Windscreen wiper ............................... 297
Manual transmission, see Transmission . 20
Mirrors ................................................. 6, 131
Misted windows .............................. 159, 170
Mobile telephone...................................... 65
Motorway lighting (AFL).................. 33, 137
Octane numbers............................. 200, 308
Oil change .............................................. 293
Oil filter change...................................... 293
Oil level and consumption............... 39, 292
Oil pressure ............................................... 37
Oils........................................................... 292
Open&Start system ................ 22, 31, 36, 70
Operating temperature ......................... 197
Outside temperature gauge ................... 47
Overrun ........................................... 197, 199
L
Language selection ............................51, 56
Lashing eyes ........................................... 102
Leather trim ............................................ 304
Level control system............................... 216
Lighting switch.......................................... 14
Lighting .......................................14, 39, 134
Driving abroad.................................... 140
Loading .................................. 239, 316, 317
Locking doors ....................................... 2, 76
Locking from the inside............................ 78
Locks........................................................ 305
Lubricants .......................................292, 307
Luggage compartment............................ 81
Bulb replacement................................ 287
FlexOrganizer...................................... 101
Lighting ............................................... 140
Loading .............................. 104, 239, 318
Locking .................................................. 81
Safety net .............................................. 99
Luggage compartment cover ........... 97, 98
Lumbar support.......................................... 4
N
Neutral, transmission ............................... 20
Number plate lights
Bulb replacement ............................... 285
Number plate lighting............................ 285
Number plates........................................ 301
P
Paintwork damage................................. 304
Panoramic windscreen..................... 34, 144
Parking distance sensors ....................... 214
Parking .............................................. 24, 214
Parking lights.................................... 14, 138
Bulb replacement ....................... 271, 274
Parts .................................................. 26, 133
Pedals...................................................... 197
Performance ........................................... 313
Petrol .......................................200, 308, 309
Pinking..................................................... 200
Pollen filter .............................................. 173
Power assisted steering, see electro-hydraulic power assisted steering........... 196
Power steering, see electro-hydraulic power assisted steering .............................. 196
Preheating .......................................... 22, 42
Preheating switch..................................... 22
Puddle light............................................. 140
Pushing, towing ...................................... 243
Index
Q
S
Quickheat ............................... 158, 165, 169
Safeguard against
unauthorised use .......................... 2, 14, 25
Safety accessories ..................128, 133, 248
Safety net.................................................. 99
Safety systems ........................................ 109
Saving energy ......................................... 198
Seat adjustment ......................................... 3
Seat belts ................................110, 113, 304
Seat height adjustment ............................. 4
Seating position........................................ 87
Seat occupancy recognition.................. 122
Seats ........................................................ 3, 4
Heated seats....................................... 156
Selector lever...........................175, 183, 189
Selector lever lock...............20, 21, 183, 189
Self-diagnosis .........................112, 121, 225
Self-help .................................................. 243
Automatic transmission ..................... 187
Electric sunroof ................................... 145
Electric windows.................................. 143
Information display .............................. 48
Radio frequency remote control ... 69, 75
Service interval display .......................... 290
Service work ................................26, 44, 290
Side airbags ............................................ 118
Signal system ...................................... 15, 16
Spare keys................................................. 66
Spare wheel ............................249, 250, 252
Speed............................................... 198, 199
Fuel consumption ....................... 198, 199
Speedometer ............................................ 45
Sport mode ............................................... 39
R
Radio ......................................................... 64
Radio equipment (CB).............................. 65
Radio reception ........................................ 64
Radio frequency remote control
Central locking system .........2, 31, 68, 71
Rain sensor........................................17, 297
Reading lights ......................................... 139
Rear light cluster..................................... 134
Bulb replacement........................276, 282
Rear window wash system.......18, 299, 303
Refuelling................................................. 201
Fuel filler cap....................................... 202
Remote control
Central locking system .........2, 31, 68, 71
Steering wheel.................................30, 64
Replacement keys .................................... 66
Reversing lights
Bulb replacement........................276, 282
Rollover protection system .................... 151
Roof lining .........................................34, 144
Roof load................ 105, 196, 199, 316, 317
Roof racks .............................. 199, 234, 318
Run-flat tyres .......................................... 231
Running-in ............................................... 196
Brakes .................................................. 222
347
Sport programme............................. 32, 210
Starter switch ............................................ 14
Starting the engine ............14, 67, 174, 243
Self-help .............................................. 243
Steam-jet cleaners .................238, 304, 305
Steering column lock.......................... 14, 24
Steering wheel adjustment .........................7
Steering wheel remote control .......... 30, 64
Stowage compartments ........................ 108
Sunroof.................................................... 144
Sunvisors ................................... 34, 140, 144
Sunblind .................................................. 145
System settings................................... 50, 55
348
Index
T
Tables ...................................................... 108
Tachometer............................................... 45
Tail lights ................................................. 134
Bulb replacement........................276, 282
Tailgate ..................................................... 81
Tank
Fuel gauge ............................................ 45
Technical data ........................................ 306
Telephone, see Mobile telephone ........... 65
Temperature regulation.................157, 169
Tempomat, see cruise control ............... 212
Temporary spare wheel .................233, 250
The first 600 miles................................... 196
Tightening torque...........................255, 326
Time .....................................................48, 51
Tools ........................................................ 251
Towing ..................................................... 245
Towing equipment ................................. 235
Towing eye ......................................245, 247
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)................... 240
Transmission display ....... 43, 174, 182, 189
Transmission, automatic... 20, 21, 182, 188
Automatic mode.........................183, 189
Driving programme ....................184, 191
Fault.............................................186, 194
Interruption of power supply .....187, 195
Kickdown .....................................185, 192
Selector lever ................ 20, 183, 189, 190
Selector lever lock ................................. 20
Winter programme .....................185, 192
Transmission, Easytronic ....................... 174
Driving programmes .......................... 176
Fault..................................................... 180
Interruption of power supply ............. 180
Kickdown............................................. 178
Selector lever................................. 20, 175
Winter programme ............................. 177
Transmission, manual .............................. 20
Tread depth ............................................ 230
Trip computer ............................... 30, 52, 58
Trip odometer..................................... 44, 45
Triple Information Display ....................... 46
TSA (Trailer Stability Assist)................... 240
Turn signal lights ..................................... 15
Bulb replacement ...............275, 276, 282
Twin Audio .......................................... 31, 64
TwinTop .................................................. 146
Closing the roof .................................. 147
Opening the roof ................................ 147
Rollover protection ............................. 151
Warning buzzers................................. 148
Wind deflector .................................... 149
Tyre chains...................................... 232, 326
Tyre condition......................................... 229
Tyre pressure ................... 32, 218, 228, 326
Tyre pressure monitoring system .......... 218
Tyre repair kit ......................................... 256
U
Units of measure ................................ 51, 57
Unleaded fuel .........................200, 203, 308
Used oil ................................................... 293
V
Valve cap key ................................. 228, 326
Vauxhall alarm system ............................ 83
Vehicle care ............................................ 302
Vehicle decommissioning ...................... 301
Vehicle Identification Number .............. 307
Vehicle keys, see Keys ............................. 66
Vehicle recommissioning ....................... 301
Vehicle tools ........................................... 251
Ventilation ......................153, 158, 165, 171
Index
W
Warning buzzers....................................... 23
Warning messages .......................49, 54, 55
Warning triangle.............................133, 248
Wash fluid reservoir,
windscreen wash system...................... 299
Weights............................................316, 317
Wheels, tyres ........................................... 226
Wind deflector ........................................ 149
Windows
Demisting
and defrosting ........... 159, 162, 166, 170
Windscreen wash system ......................... 18
Anti-freeze protection ........................ 299
Capacities....................................336, 337
Wash fluid reservoir ............................ 299
Windscreen wiper .............................17, 297
Winter mode
Starting-off aid ................................... 177
Winter operation
Battery ................................................. 197
Coolant, anti-freeze............................ 294
Fuel consumption ............................... 199
Fuel for diesel engines........................ 201
Heating............................... 153, 162, 166
Locks .................................................... 305
Tyre chains ..................................232, 326
Window demisting and defrosting .... 159
Windscreen wash system,
anti-freeze protection......................... 299
Winter programme ................ 177, 185, 192
Winter tyres .....................................232, 326
X
Xenon headlight system ........................ 272
Bulb replacement ............................... 272
Driving abroad.................................... 140
349
Owner’s Manual
ASTRA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: January 2006.
TS 1612-B-06
A ST R A
©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising